Buick 2010 Lacrosse Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Buick Buick-2010-Buick-Lacrosse-Owners-Manual-812764 buick-2010-buick-lacrosse-owners-manual-812764 buick pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 418 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2010 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Doors.........................1-11
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Roof..........................1-19
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 3-2
Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-38
OnStar
®
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Universal Remote System . . . . 4-45
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 6-34
Phone........................6-42
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-17
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-27
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-34
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-40
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-60
2010 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 10-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .10-10
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 12-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-14
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Index ..................... i-1
Introduction iii
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the
GM Emblem, BUICK, the BUICK
Emblem, and the name LaCrosse
are registered trademarks of
General Motors.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase
or due to changes subsequent to
the printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited”for
Buick Motor Division wherever
it appears in this manual.
Manufactured under license
under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
and the DTS logos and Symbol
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. ©
1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories.
All rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20923540 A First Printing ©2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering
or disassembly is prohibited.
“Made for iPod”means that an
electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically
to iPod and has been certified
by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. iPod is a
trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438
de langue française
www.helminc.com
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information
about the vehicle use the Index in
the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number
where it can be found.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
Introduction v
{WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
A circle with a slash through it
is a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this”or
“Do not let this happen.”
Symbols
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
M:This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
*:This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer
to the index.
9:Airbag Readiness Light
#:Air Conditioning
!:Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar
®
$:Brake System Warning Light
":Charging System
I:Cruise Control
B:Engine Coolant Temperature
vi Introduction
O:Exterior Lamps
#:Fog Lamps
.:Fuel Gauge
+:Fuses
i:Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j:LATCH System Child
Restraints
*:Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::Oil Pressure
}:Power
/:Remote Vehicle Start
>:Safety Belt Reminders
7:Tire Pressure Monitor
d:Traction Control
M:Windshield Washer Fluid
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys .......................... 1-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Doors
Trunk ........................ 1-11
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-13
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Exterior Mirrors
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-16
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
{WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
{WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.
The key, that is part of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
can be used for the ignition and all
locks if the vehicle is a key access
vehicle. If the vehicle has the
keyless ignition, the key can be
used for the locks.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-3
Press the button on the RKE
transmitter to extend the key.
Press the button and the key
blade to retract the key.
See your dealer/retailer if a new key
is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys
in the vehicle, you may have to
damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 12‑6
or OnStar
®
System
on page 4‑43
.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement
on
page 12‑17
for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could
void authorization to use this
equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.Check the distance.
The transmitter may be
too far from the vehicle.
.Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
.Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement”later
in this section.
.If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician for service.
1-4 Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
(Key Access)
The transmitter functions will work
up to 20 m (65 feet) away from the
vehicle. On vehicles with remote
start the distance will be greater.
Keep in mind that other conditions,
such as those previously stated,
can impact the performance of the
transmitter. RKE without Remote Start Shown
The following may be available:
Q(Lock): Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may
flash and/or the horn may sound
to indicate locking, see “Locking
Feedback”under Vehicle
Personalization
on page 4‑38
.
If the driver door is open when Qis
pressed, all doors lock except the
driver door, if enabled through the
vehicle personalization.
If the passenger door is open
when Qis pressed, all doors lock.
Pressing Qmay also arm
the theft-deterrent system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System
on
page 1‑13
.
K(Unlock): Press to unlock
the driver door or all doors, see
“Door Unlock Options”under
Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate unlocking, see “Unlock
Feedback”under Vehicle
Personalization
on page 4‑38
.
Pressing Kwill disarm
the theft-deterrent system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System
on
page 1‑13
.
V(Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold to unlock the trunk.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-5
7(Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release
one time to locate the vehicle.
The exterior lamps flash and the
horn chirps.
Press and hold 7for at least
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signals flash until 7is pressed
again or the vehicle is started.
/(Remote Vehicle Start): For
vehicles with this feature, press Q
and then press and hold /within
five seconds to start the engine from
outside the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start
on page 1‑8
for additional
information.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer/
retailer. When the replacement
transmitter is programmed to this
vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be reprogrammed.
Any lost or stolen transmitters
will no longer work once the
new transmitter is programmed.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the Replace
Battery in Remote Key message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery in Remote Key”under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑36.
The battery is not rechargeable.
See your dealer/retailer to replace
the battery.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
(Keyless Access)
The Keyless Access System lets
you lock and unlock the doors and
access the trunk without removing
the remote transmitter from your
pocket, purse, briefcase, etc.
The keyless access transmitter
should be within 1 m (3 feet) of
the door or trunk being opened.
Keyless Unlocking
With the keyless access transmitter
within 1 m (3 feet), approach the
front door and pull the handle to
unlock and open the door. If the
transmitter is recognized, the door
will unlock and open.
Entering any door other than the
driver door will always cause all of
the doors to unlock. This is not
customizable.
1-6 Keys, Doors and Windows
To customize which doors unlock
when the driver's door is opened,
see “Door Unlock Options”under
Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
.
Lock Sensor
When all doors are closed and the
ignition is off, the vehicle can be
locked by pressing this area on the
door handle. This feature will be
available for several minutes after
the vehicle has been turned off.
Keyless Trunk Opening
Lift up on the touch pad located
above the license plate to open
the trunk if the keyless access
transmitter is within range.
Transmitter Buttons
See the information on how the
transmitter buttons function earlier
in this section under “Remote
Keyless Transmitter Operation
(Key Access)”.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only keyless access transmitters
programmed to the vehicle will work.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen,
a replacement can be purchased
and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be
reprogrammed so that lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work. Any
remaining transmitters will need to
be reprogrammed. Each vehicle can
have up to five transmitters matched
to it.
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle
when there are two recognized
transmitters available. If there are
not two recognized transmitters
available see your dealer/retailer.
To program, the vehicle must be
off and all of the transmitters, both
currently recognized and new, must
be with you.
1. Place the recognized
transmitters in the cupholder.
2. Insert the vehicle key of the new
transmitter into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside
of the driver door and turn the
key to the unlock position five
times within ten seconds.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays Ready For
Remote #2, 3, 4 or 5.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-7
3. Place the new transmitter
into the transmitter pocket.
The transmitter pocket is
located inside the center
console storage area under
the cupholder. The cupholder
will need to be pulled out to
access the transmitter pocket.
4. Press the ignition. When the
transmitter is learned the DIC
will display will show that it is
ready to program the next
transmitter.
5. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter pocket and press the
unlock button.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 5 seconds to exit
programming mode.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
If the transmitter battery is weak,
the DIC may display No Remote
Detected when you try to start the
vehicle. The Replace Battery in
Remote Key message may also be
displayed at this time.
To start the vehicle:
1. Remove the cupholder from the
center console storage area.
2. Place the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing up.
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the ignition control.
See Starting the Engine
on
page 8‑20
, for additional
information about the vehicle's
keyless ignition with push start.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the Replace
Battery in Remote Key message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery in Remote Key”under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑36.
The battery is not rechargeable.
See your dealer/retailer to replace
the battery.
1-8 Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Vehicle Start
If available, this feature allows the
engine to be started from outside
the vehicle.
This button /will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
To enable and disable remote start,
see “Remote Vehicle Start”under
Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
1. Press Qon the RKE transmitter.
The vehicle's doors will be
locked.
2. Within five seconds, press and
hold /until the turn signal
lamps flash. This confirms
the request to remote start
the vehicle has been received.
Once the vehicle is started, the
parking lamps will turn on and
remain on as long as the engine
is running.
3. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN
(Key Access), or select the
ON/RUN/START ignition position
(Keyless Access), to drive the
vehicle.
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension is done or the ignition
is put in ON/RUN (Key Access)
or ON/RUN/START (Keyless
Access).
Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system will default to a
heating or cooling mode depending
on the outside temperature during a
remote start. When the key is turned
to ON/RUN (Key Access), or the
ON/RUN/START ignition position
is selected (Keyless Access), the
climate control system will turn on
at the setting the vehicle was set to
when the vehicle was last turned off.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-9
Vehicles with heated or heated and
ventilated front seats can have this
feature turn on automatically during
a remote start see “Remote Start
Heated Seats”and “Remote Start
Vented Seats”under Vehicle
Personalization
on page 4‑38
for more information.
Extending Engine Run Time
For a 10 minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
still running. The remote start can
only be extended once.
When the remote start is extended,
the second 10 minutes will start
immediately.
For example, if the vehicle has
been running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
The vehicle's ignition must be
turned on and then back off before
the remote start procedure can be
used again.
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start
To shut off the engine:
.Press /until the parking lamps
turn off.
.Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
The remote start will not operate if:
.The key is in the ignition
(Key Access) or the ignition
is in any position other than
OFF (Keyless Access).
.The transmitter is in the vehicle
(Keyless Access).
.The hood is not closed.
.The hazard warning flashers
are on.
.There is an emission control
system malfunction.
.The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
.The oil pressure is low.
.Two remote vehicle starts have
already been used.
.The vehicle is not in P (Park).
1-10 Keys, Doors and Windows
Door Locks
{WARNING
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
To lock and unlock the door, use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key from the
outside and the door lock knob
or switch from the inside.
From inside the vehicle with the
doors locked, pull once on the door
handle to unlock it, and a second
time to open it.
Manually locking the driver door
also automatically locks all other
doors. If the driver door is open,
or the key is in the ignition the driver
door unlocks.
For more information see:
.Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access)
on page 1‑4
or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access)
on
page 1‑5
.Power Door Locks
on
page 1‑10
.Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches
are located on the center of the
instrument panel.
K(Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Q(Lock): Press to lock the doors.
See Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
for more information.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-11
Safety Locks
Press the button on the driver door
armrest to activate the safety locks
on the passenger rear doors.
This switch also disables the rear
power windows.
Once activated, the light, located on
the switch, illuminates and goes out
when deactivated.
If the light flashes the feature may
not be working properly.
Doors
Trunk
{WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.Close all of the windows.
.Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.If the vehicle has a power
liftgate, disable the power
liftgate function.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑26.
1-12 Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Trunk Release
To open the trunk from the outside
the vehicle, press the Vbutton on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, or by pressing the
touchpad above the license plate.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
There is an emergency trunk
release handle located inside the
trunk on the trunk latch. On some
vehicles, the release handle can be
accessed by folding the rear seat
center seatback. See Rear Seats
on page 2‑9
. Pull the release
handle to open the trunk from the
inside.
Rear Seat Pass-Through
The vehicle has a small door in the
rear seat. This door allows access
to the trunk from inside the vehicle.
The rear seat armrest must be down
for the pass-through door to open.
To release the pass-through door,
pull the release handle. To close the
door, raise it and push it until it
latches.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-13
Vehicle Security
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features, however, they do not
make it impossible to steal.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
Arming the System
To arm the system, press Qon the
RKE transmitter.
The alarm automatically arms after
about 30 seconds. The security
light, located on the instrument
panel, flashes.
Press Von the RKE transmitter to
open the trunk without setting off the
alarm. The system rearms when the
trunk is closed.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the
following:
.Press Kon the RKE transmitter.
.Approach the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter (Keyless
Access).
.Start the engine.
The alarm automatically disarms.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
If Kis pressed and the horn
sounds, an attempted break-in
has occurred while the system
was armed.
If the alarm has been activated,
the Theft Attempted message will
appear on the DIC. See Key and
Lock Messages
on page 4‑36
for
additional information.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement
on
page 12‑17
for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access)
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key.
1-14 Keys, Doors and Windows
The key uses a transponder that
matches an immobilizer control unit
in the vehicle and automatically
disarms the system. Only the
correct key starts the vehicle.
The vehicle may not start if the
key is damaged.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming
or disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key.
If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start, the
first key may be damaged. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access)
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the transmitter
leaves the vehicle.
The immobilization system is
disarmed when the ignition button is
pushed in and a valid transmitter is
found in the vehicle.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming
or disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
The system has one or more
transmitters that are matched to
an immobilizer control unit in your
vehicle. Only a correctly matched
transmitter will start the vehicle.
If the transmitter is ever damaged,
you may not be able to start your
vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-15
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the keyless access transmitter
appears to be undamaged, try
another keyless access transmitter.
Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket
located in the center console. See
“No Remote Detected”under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑36.
If the engine does not start with
the other transmitter or when the
transmitter is on the pocket in the
center console, your vehicle needs
service. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the theft-deterrent
system and have a new transmitter
programmed to the vehicle.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
Exterior Mirrors
Power Mirrors
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Turn the control knob to the
L (left) or R (right) selecting the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Push the control knob to the left,
right, up, or down to adjust the
mirror.
Vehicles with the memory feature
can store a preferred mirror position.
See “Memory Seats”under Power
Seat Adjustment
on page 2‑4
for
more information.
Folding Mirrors
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Vehicles with manual folded mirrors
are folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an
automatic car wash. To fold, pull the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the
mirror outward, to return it to the
original position.
Automatic Dimming Feature
The driver outside mirror
automatically adjusts for the glare of
the headlamps behind you.
1-16 Keys, Doors and Windows
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle might have a turn signal
indicator lamp that is built into the
mirror housing. The turn signal lamp
flashes with the use of the vehicle's
turn signal and hazard flashers.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
<(Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger”under
Automatic Climate Control System
on page 7‑1
for more information.
Park Tilt Mirrors
If the vehicle has the memory
package, the outside mirrors
have a park tilt feature. This feature
automatically tilts the outside
mirrors to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse).
This allows the driver to view the
curb for parallel parking.
The passenger and driver mirrors
return to their original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
off or to OFF/LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or
off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Vehicle
Personalization
on page 4‑38
for more information.
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust this mirror for a clear view of
the area behind the vehicle. Hold
the mirror in the center to move it
up, down, or side-to-side. To reduce
headlamp glare during night-time
use, move the lever at the bottom of
the mirror to the right.
Vehicles with OnStar
®
have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe
to OnStar. See OnStar
®
System
on
page 4‑43
for more information
about the services OnStar provides.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-17
Windows
{WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Power Windows
The power window switches located
on the driver door control all four
windows. The passenger door only
has a window switch that controls
that window. Push the switch down
to open the window. Pull the front of
the switch up to close it.
The switches work when the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP). See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 8‑20.
1-18 Keys, Doors and Windows
Express Window Operation
Windows with an express-up or
down feature allow the window to be
lowered or raised without holding
the switch. Rear windows only have
express down. Pull a window switch
up or push it down all the way,
release it, and the window goes
down or up automatically. Stop the
window by pushing or pulling the
switch.
Rear Window Lockout
The rear window lockout
button vis located on the driver
door near the window switches.
Press the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the
button illuminates, indicating the
feature is in use. The rear windows
still can be raised or lowered using
the driver window switches when
the lockout feature is active.
To restore power to the rear
windows, press the button again.
The light on the button will go out.
If the light flashes, the feature may
not be working properly.
This switch also activates the Safety
Locks. See Power Door Locks
on
page 1‑10
for more information.
Programming the Power
Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged, disconnected,
or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window
for the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
To program each front window,
follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close
all doors.
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-19
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor toward you or
move it to the side to reduce glare.
Rear Window Sunshade
On vehicles with this feature the
switch Qis located on the center
console, to the right of the shifter.
The engine must be running to
operate it.
Press the switch Qto raise or
lower the sunshade.
If the shade is up, and the vehicle
is shifted into R (Reverse) it will
automatically lower. When the
vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)
it does not automatically raise itself.
To raise the sunshade, press the
front of the switch.
Roof
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switch is located on the overhead
console.
The sunroof only operates when
the ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/
ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑20.
Vent
The sunroof has an express-vent
open feature. From the closed
position, press the rear of the
sunroof switch (A) to vent the
sunroof. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a second
time. To close the sunroof, press
and hold the front of the sunroof
switch (B). To stop the sunroof
partway, release the switch.
1-20 Keys, Doors and Windows
Express-Open/Express-Close
To express-open the sunroof from
the closed or vent position, fully
press and release the rear of the
switch (A). The sunroof opens
automatically. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a second
time. To express-close the sunroof,
fully press and release the front of
the switch (B). The sunroof closes
automatically. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a
second time.
If the sunshade is closed, it opens
automatically with the sunroof but
can also be express-opened/
express-closed by using the
sunshade control (C) (D).
The sunshade cannot be fully
closed with the sunroof open.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade
forward of the sliding glass panel
may cause damage and the
sunroof may not operate properly.
Always close the glass panel
before closing the sunshade.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if the vehicle has
an electrical failure.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect
the object and stop the sunroof
from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof, and
sunshade will then return to the
open or vent position. To close
the sunroof once the obstruction
has been removed, refer to the
"Express-Open/Express-Close"
functions described previously.
Do not keep the sunroof open for
long periods of time while the
vehicle is not in use. Debris can
collect in the tracks, damage the
sunroof operation and plug the
water draining system.
Seats and Restraints 2-1
Seats and
Restraints
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 2-24
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-27
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-37
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-38
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-43
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-45
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children
(LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head rests in the
outboard seating positions.
{WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Front Seat
To raise or lower the head restraint,
press the release button located on
the side of the head restraint and
pull up or push the head restraint
down and release the button.
Pull and push on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
Seats and Restraints 2-3
Rear Seat
Pull the head rest up to raise it.
To lower the head rest, press the
release button, located on the head
rest post on the top of the seatback,
while you push the head rest down.
Push down on the head rest after
the button is released to make sure
that it is locked in place.
This vehicle's head restraints and
head rests are not designed to be
removed.
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seat Adjustment
{WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seat position:
1. Pull the handle located at the
front of the seat.
2. Move the seat forward or
backward to adjust the seat
position.
3. Release the handle to stop the
seat from moving.
2-4 Seats and Restraints
Power Seat Adjustment
To adjust a power seat, do any of
the following:
.Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
.Raise or lower the entire seat
by moving the entire control up
or down.
Memory Seats
The vehicle may have a memory
function which allows seat settings
to be saved and recalled.
To save your positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, including
the seatback recliner and both
outside mirrors to a comfortable
position.
2. Press and hold MEM and
button 1until the beep lets you
know that the position has been
stored.
A second seating and mirror
position can be programmed by
repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2.
Seats and Restraints 2-5
To recall the memory positions,
press and hold either button 1 or
button 2 corresponding to the
desired driving position. The seat
and outside mirrors move to
the position previously stored.
Releasing the button before the
stored position is reached cancels
the recall.
Using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to enter
the vehicle with the remote recall
memory feature on causes
automatic seat and mirror
adjustment associated with that
transmitter. There is no adjustment
when the position has not been
changed by another seating
position.
To stop recall movement of the
memory feature at any time, press
one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, or power mirror
buttons.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling a memory
position, the driver seat recall may
stop working. If this happens, press
the appropriate control for the area
that is not recalling for two seconds,
after the obstruction is removed.
Then try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the
appropriate memory button. If the
memory position is still not being
recalled, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
Easy Exit Seat
With this feature, the driver seat
automatically moves back to give
the driver more room to exit when
the ignition is turned to OFF and the
driver door is opened.
Lumbar Adjustment
To increase or decrease lumbar
support, press and hold the front or
rear of the round control knob.
To raise or lower lumbar support,
press and hold the top or bottom of
the round control knob.
Release the control knob when the
seatback reaches the desired level
of lumbar support.
See Power Seat Adjustment
on
page 2‑4
for more information.
2-6 Seats and Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks
{WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving.
The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make
you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver's
seat only when the vehicle is not
moving.
{WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
On vehicles with manual reclining
seatbacks, the control lever is
located on the outboard side of
the seat.
Seats and Restraints 2-7
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
On vehicles with power reclining
seatbacks the vertical control is
located on the outboard side of
the seat.
.To recline the seatback, press
the control toward the rear of the
vehicle.
.To raise the seatback, press the
control toward the front of the
vehicle.
Heated Front Seats
On vehicles with heated seats, the
buttons are located near the climate
controls.
The ignition must be on to use this
feature.
Press the button to heat the seat
cushion and seatback. A light on
that button indicates the feature
is on.
2-8 Seats and Restraints
There are three temperature
settings:
.High = three lights
.Medium = two lights
.Low = one light
The heat comes on at the highest
setting. Each press of the button
decreases the temperature setting
by one.
To turn the feature off, press the
button until the display lights
turn off.
If the vehicle has remote vehicle
start and is started by using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, the front heated seats
will be turned on to the high setting
if it is cold outside. When the key
is inserted into the ignition and the
ignition is turned on, the heated
seat feature will turn off. To turn the
heated seat feature back on, press
the desired button.
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
On vehicle with the heated and
ventilated cooled seat feature the
buttons are located near the climate
controls.
To use this feature the ignition must
be on.
Press a button to turn on the
desired feature. A light on that
button indicates the feature is on.
There are three temperature
settings for each feature:
.High = three
.Medium = two
.Low = one
Press a button to turn the feature
on at the maximum setting. Each
press of the button changes the
temperature one setting.
Turn the feature off by pressing
the button until the display lights
turn off.
If the vehicle has remote vehicle
start and is started by using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the
heated and ventilated seats turn on
at the maximum setting according to
the temperature outside. When the
key is inserted into the ignition and
the ignition is turned on, the heated
or cooled seat feature turns off.
To turn this feature back on, press
the desired button.
Seats and Restraints 2-9
Rear Seats
The vehicle's rear seat can be
folded down to allow for more cargo
space or it can be placed back into
a locked upright position. Adjust the
seatback only when the vehicle is
not moving.
To fold the seatback down:
1. Be sure the safety belt is in the
retainer clip.
2. Pull on the lever located on the
top of the of the seatback to
unlock it.
3. Fold the seatback down.
To raise the seatback:
1. Push the seatback up and
push it back to lock it into place.
Make sure the safety belt is in
the retainer clip and does not
get twisted or caught in the
seatback.
2. A tab on the handle pops down
to indicate the seatback has
been locked.
3. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
into position.
2-10 Seats and Restraints
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
{WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where
a safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
{WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders
on
page 4‑14
for additional
information.
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Seats and Restraints 2-11
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
2-12 Seats and Restraints
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Seats and Restraints 2-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be —whether you
are wearing a safety belt or
not. But your chance of being
conscious during and after an
accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if
you are belted. And you can
unbuckle a safety belt, even
if you are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts —not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true
not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and
other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash —even
one that is not your fault —you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children
on
page 2‑39
or Infants and Young
Children
on page 2‑41
. Follow
those rules for everyone's
protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
2-14 Seats and Restraints
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you
slid under it, the belt would apply
force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Seats and Restraints 2-15
{WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
{WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
2-16 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is over an armrest.
Seats and Restraints 2-17
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much
force to the ribs, which are not
as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
spleen. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
2-18 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then
be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
Seats and Restraints 2-19
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender
on page 2‑23
.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
2-20 Seats and Restraints
Adjustment”later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Slide the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing, when the safety belt is
not in use. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop on the
side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off of the
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt
height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
Press the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster to the
desired position. The adjuster can
be moved up by pushing the slide/
trim up. After the adjuster is set to
the desired position, try to move it
down without pushing the release
button to make sure it has locked
into position.
Seats and Restraints 2-21
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety
belt pretensioners cannot be seen,
they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They can help tighten
the safety belts during the early
stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if
the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met.
Pretensioners work only once.
If the pretensioners activate in a
crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for
the vehicle's safety belt system.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash on page 2‑24.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer/
retailer. The guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older
children who have outgrown booster
seats and for some adults. When
installed and properly adjusted, the
comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside
passenger position in the rear seat.
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
2-22 Seats and Restraints
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is
not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under
the belt and the guide on top.
{WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
Seats and Restraints 2-23
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer/retailer will
order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest
coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let
someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed
for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to
the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
2-24 Seats and Restraints
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working
properly. Look for any other loose
or damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer/
retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect
you in a crash. They can rip apart
under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders
on page 4‑14
for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care
on
page 2‑24
.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
{WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
{WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑15.
Seats and Restraints 2-25
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.A frontal airbag for the driver.
.A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
.A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
.A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
.A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
.A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
The vehicle may have the following
airbags:
.A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the rear seat
passenger seated directly
behind the driver.
.A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the rear seat
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
2-26 Seats and Restraints
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt —even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑28.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints”to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly —whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
{WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children
on page 2‑39
or
Infants and Young Children
on
page 2‑41
.
Seats and Restraints 2-27
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light
on page 4‑15
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger's side.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
2-28 Seats and Restraints
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar
If the vehicle has second row seat‐
mounted side impact airbags, they
are in the sides of the rear seatback
closest to the door.
{WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of
an inflating roof-rail airbag will
be blocked.
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or
right front passenger's head and
chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact
exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how
severe a crash is likely to be in time
for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
Seats and Restraints 2-29
Frontal airbags may inflate
at different crash speeds.
For example:
.If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
.If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
.If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System
on page 2‑25
.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof‐rail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
Roof‐rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rear impacts. Both roof‐rail
airbags will deploy when either side
of the vehicle is struck or if the
sensing system predicts that the
vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.
2-30 Seats and Restraints
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate?
on
page 2‑28
for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑30.
The parts of the airbag that
come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch.
Seats and Restraints 2-31
There may be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from
seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
{WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
those features.
{WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions
in the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
2-32 Seats and Restraints
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
.The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy
on
page 12‑15
and Event Data
Recorders on page 12‑16.
.Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the instrument panel when the
vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF will be
visible during the system check.
If you are using remote start,
if equipped, to start the vehicle from
a distance you may not see the
system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑15.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
Seats and Restraints 2-33
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.”This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag if:
.The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
.The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
restraint.
.The system determines that
a small child is present in a
booster seat.
.A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
.The right front passenger seat is
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
.Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
2-34 Seats and Restraints
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, the
off indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbags are off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑15.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger
seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active.
For some children who have
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the
person's seating posture and body
build. Everyone in the vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly —whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
{WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light
on page 4‑15
for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat)
on page 2‑54
or Securing
Child Restraints (Front Seat)
on
page 2‑56
.
Seats and Restraints 2-35
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is
still lit, turn the vehicle off.
Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is
not pushing the child restraint
into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under
the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2‑2
.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit,
secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle, and check with your
dealer/retailer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
2-36 Seats and Restraints
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts”and “Child
Restraints”in the Index for
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and
seat massagers can affect how
well the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
on
page 2‑37
for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
{WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are
parts of the airbag system in
several places around the vehicle.
Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about
servicing the vehicle and the airbag
system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 12‑13.
{WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Seats and Restraints 2-37
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag
system.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or
a comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off
the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing
System
on page 2‑32
.
If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 12‑1.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 12‑1.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
2-38 Seats and Restraints
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light
on
page 4‑15
for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken,
the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
on page 2‑30
. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
{WARNING
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away.
See Airbag Readiness Light
on
page 4‑15
for more information.
Seats and Restraints 2-39
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
.Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, then return to the
booster seat.
.Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
2-40 Seats and Restraints
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
{WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Seats and Restraints 2-41
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
2-42 Seats and Restraints
{WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available.
When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Seats and Restraints 2-43
{WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
2-44 Seats and Restraints
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help
a child to see out the window.
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
Seats and Restraints 2-45
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
on
page 2‑47
for more information.
Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle —even when no child is
in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
2-46 Seats and Restraints
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.”This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one can
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑32
for additional
information.
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If a child restraint is secured in the
center rear seating position, the
safety belts and the child restraint
LATCH anchors for the rear outside
seating positions will not be
accessible. Child restraints or
passengers will not be able to ride
in the rear outside seating positions.
If two child restraints are secured in
the rear outside seating positions,
the safety belt for the center rear
seat position will not be accessible.
Child restraints or passengers will
not be able to ride in the center rear
seating position.
Wherever you install a child
restraint, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle —even when no child
is in it.
Seats and Restraints 2-47
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Child restraint or occupant
prohibited
A. Child restraint or occupant
prohibited
B. Child restraint using LATCH
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in the vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains
how to attach a child restraint with
these attachments in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions
or child restraints have lower
anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
2-48 Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint
with lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.
The child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have
a top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
Seats and Restraints 2-49
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Rear Seat
i(Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j(Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors, each rear anchor
position has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
The top tether anchors are located
under the covers, behind the rear
seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to
use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
2-50 Seats and Restraints
Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the
Restraint
on page 2‑45
for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
{WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
{WARNING
Do not attach more than one
child restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
{WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
belts behind the child restraint
so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear
seat with a safety belt buckled.
This could damage the safety belt
or the seat. Unbuckle and return
the safety belt to its stowed
position, before folding the seat.
Seats and Restraints 2-51
If you need to secure more than
one child restraint in the rear seat,
see Where to Put the Restraint
on
page 2‑45
. Depending on where
you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain
safety belt assemblies or LATCH
anchors for additional passengers
or child restraints.
You cannot secure three child
restraints using the LATCH anchors
in the rear seat at the same time,
but you can install two of them.
If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the
passenger-side position, and
install the other one either in the
driver-side position or in the center
position. Refer to the following
illustration to learn which anchors
to use.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat
Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower
Anchors
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower
Anchors
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do
not use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments
to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors
for the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2-52 Seats and Restraints
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according
to the child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Seats and Restraints 2-53
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 2‑2
.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether
route the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
{WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer/retailer to have
the system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
2-54 Seats and Restraints
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System)
on page 2‑47
for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint
is secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
on
page 2‑47
for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 2‑45.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Seats and Restraints 2-55
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System)
on page 2‑47
for more
information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
2-56 Seats and Restraints
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Seat )
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure
a forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint
on
page 2‑45
.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System
on page 2‑32
and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 4‑15
for more information,
including important safety
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.”This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑32
for additional
information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System)
on page 2‑47
for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint
is secured using a safety belt and
it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
on page 2‑47
for top tether anchor locations.
Seats and Restraints 2-57
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay
lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑15.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
2-58 Seats and Restraints
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see
“If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint ”under Passenger
Sensing System
on page 2‑32
for
more information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Storage 3-1
Storage
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 3-2
Additional Storage Features
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Storage
Compartments
Glove Box
The glove box is located on the
passenger side of the instrument
panel. Lift up on the lever to open it.
Cupholders
There are removable cupholders
located in the center console.
Slide the cover (B) to access the
cupholders. Cupholders are also
located in the rear armrest.
3-2 Storage
Front Storage
The driver's storage compartment
is located near the left side of the
steering column on the bottom of
the instrument panel. Pull the cover
down to open.
Center Console Storage
A two tiered storage area is under
the front adjustable armrest.
Push the button (A) on the
underside of the front edge
of the cover to open.
Accessory Power Outlet is in the
lower area.
Some vehicles might also have
input jacks for auxiliary audio
devices. See Auxiliary Devices
under Audio Players for more
information.
Additional Storage
Features
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net located in
the trunk to store small loads as far
forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.
Attach the loops on each corner of
the net to the hooks located on the
sides of the trunk.
Instruments and Controls 4-1
Instruments and
Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 4-7
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Clock (Without Date
Display) ..................... 4-8
Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 4-9
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-14
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-15
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-16
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 4-22
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-23
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 4-24
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 4-25
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-2 Instruments and Controls
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 4-29
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Brake System Messages . . . . 4-33
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-34
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 4-35
Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-36
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 4-36
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-36
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-38
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-38
OnStar
®
System
OnStar
®
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 4-45
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Instruments and Controls 4-3
2NOTES
4-4 Instruments and Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
Instruments and Controls 4-5
A. Air Vents on page 7‑8.
B. Head-Up Display (HUD)
on
page 4‑29
(If Equipped).
C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.
See Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
on page 5‑4
. Driver
Information Center Buttons. See
Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑25
.
D. Instrument Cluster
on
page 4‑12
. Driver Information
Center Display. See Driver
Information Center (DIC)
on
page 4‑25
.
E. Windshield Wiper/Washer
on
page 4‑7
.
F. Info‐Display.
G. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑12.
H. Exterior Lamp Controls
on
page 5‑1
.Fog Lamps
on
page 5‑4
(If Equipped).
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 5‑5.
I. Front Storage on page 3‑2.
J. Cruise Control
on page 8‑37
.
Heated Steering Wheel
on
page 4‑7
.
K. Steering Wheel Adjustment
on
page 4‑6
.
L. Horn on page 4‑7.
M. Steering Wheel Controls
on
page 4‑6
.
N. Ignition Positions (Keyless
Access)
on page 8‑18
or
Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 8‑19
.
O. Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 2‑8.
P. Automatic Climate Control
System
on page 7‑1
or Dual
Automatic Climate Control
System on page 7‑4.
Q. Power Door Locks
on
page 1‑10
.Hazard Warning
Flashers
on page 5‑3
.
Passenger Sensing System
on
page 2‑32
.
R. Parking Brake on page 8‑32.
S. PRNDL. See Automatic
Transmission on page 8‑27.
T. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
Park on page 8‑24.
U. Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑34
.Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)
on
page 8‑35
.Ultrasonic Parking
Assist
on page 8‑40
. Power
Rear Sunshade.
V. Glove Box on page 3‑1.
4-6 Instruments and Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
The adjustment lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down and in or out to a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock
the steering wheel in
place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Steering Wheel Controls
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b/g(Push to Talk): For vehicles
with an OnStar
®
, Bluetooth
®
,
or navigation system, press to
interact with those systems. See
OnStar
®
System
on page 4‑43
,
Bluetooth (Overview)
on page 6‑42
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 6‑43
or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition)
on page 6‑46
or
Bluetooth (Navigation)
on
page 6‑58
, or the separate
navigation manual for more
information.
$/c(End Call / Mute): Press
to silence the vehicle speakers
only. Press again to turn the sound
on. For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
_SRC ^(Rotary Control): Press
to select an audio source.
Toggle up or down to select the next
or previous favorite radio station or
CD track, DVD, if equipped, track,
or MP3 track.
Instruments and Controls 4-7
+x−(Volume): Press + to
increase the volume, press −to
decrease the volume.
Heated Steering Wheel
For vehicles with a heated steering
wheel, the button for this feature is
located on the climate control
system.
(:Press to turn the heated
steering wheel on or off. A light on
the button displays when the feature
is turned on.
The steering wheel takes about
three minutes to start heating.
Horn
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper lever is on the
side of the steering column. With
the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN, move the windshield
wiper lever to select the wiper
speed.
2: Fast wipes.
1: Slow wipes.
&(Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Turn the band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
9(Off): Turns the windshield
wipers off.
3(Mist): Single wipe, briefly
move the wiper lever down. Several
wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 9‑30.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
4-8 Instruments and Controls
Wipe Parking
If the ignition is turned LOCK/OFF
while the wipers are on 1, 2 or &,
they will immediately stop.
If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to OFF before the driver
door is opened or within 10 minutes,
the wipers will restart and move to
the base of the windshield.
If the ignition is turned to
LOCK/OFF while the wipers
are performing wipes due to
windshield wash, the wipers
continue to run until they reach
the base of the windshield.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
The wipers will continue until the
lever is released or the maximum
wash time is reached.
When the windshield wiper lever is
released, additional wipes may
occur depending on how long the
windshield washer had been
activated. See Washer Fluid
on
page 9‑24
for information on filling
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
{WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass
receives its heading and other
information from Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
and vehicle speed information.
Avoid covering the GPS antenna
for long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
See Backglass Antenna
on
page 6‑19
and Satellite Radio
Antenna
on page 6‑19
for the
location of the vehicle's antennas.
The compass system is designed to
operate for a certain number of
miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
satellites. When the compass
display shows CAL, drive the
vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
GPS signal is restored and provide
a heading again. See Compass
Messages
on page 4‑34
for more
information on the messages that
may be displayed for the compass.
Clock (Without Date
Display)
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation
on
page 6‑7
for information about
how to use the menu system.
Instruments and Controls 4-9
Setting the Time
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings, or press
the Hbutton.
2. Select Set Time.
3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust
the highlighted value.
4. Press the SELECT button to
select the next value.
5. To save the time and return to
the Time Settings menu, press
the 0BACK button at any time
or press the SELECT button
after adjusting the minutes.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings, or press
the Hbutton.
2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
3. Press the SELECT button to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Clock (With Date Display)
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation
on
page 6‑7
for information about
how to use the menu system.
Setting the Time and Date
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press the Hbutton.
2. Select Set Time or Set Date.
3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust
the highlighted value.
4. Press the SELECT button to
select the next value.
5. To save the time or date
and return to the Time and
Date Settings menu, press
the 0BACK button at any time
or press the SELECT button
after adjusting the minutes
or year.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press the Hbutton.
2. Highlight Set Time Format.
3. Press the SELECT button to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Setting the Month & Day
Format
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press the Hbutton.
2. Highlight Set Date Format.
3. Press the SELECT button
to select MM/DD/YY
(month/day/year) or
DD/MM/YY (day/month/year).
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings,
or press the Hbutton.
2. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
4-10 Instruments and Controls
3. Press the SELECT button to turn
Auto Time Adjust on or off.
4. Press the SELECT button to
select Time Zone, and then
select the Time Zone.
5. Press the SELECT button to turn
Daylight Savings on or off.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can
be used to connect electrical
equipment, such as a cellular
phone.
There are two accessory power
outlets, one is located inside the
center console storage and other on
the rear of the center floor console.
Open the protective cover to use the
accessory power outlet.
Certain electrical accessories
may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlets and could
result in blown vehicle or adapter
fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for
additional information on the
accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not hang any type
of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because
the power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only.
Power Outlet 120 Volt Alternating
Current
The vehicle may have a power
outlet that can be used to plug in
electrical equipment that uses a
maximum limit of 150 watts.
The power outlet is located on the
rear of the center console.
An indicator light on the outlet turns
on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN and equipment requiring
less than 150 watts is plugged into
the outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
Instruments and Controls 4-11
The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
if no equipment is plugged into the
outlet.
If you try to connect equipment
using more than 150 watts or
a system fault is detected, the
equipment may operate for a
short period and turn itself off.
A protection circuit shuts off the
power supply and the indicator light
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug
the item and plug it back in or turn
the Remote Accessory Power (RAP)
off and then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)
on
page 8‑20
. Prolonged usage of the
power outlet at the maximum load
of 150 watts, may cause the outlet
to overheat and automatically
shutdown. The power restarts when
equipment that operates within the
limit is plugged into the outlet and a
system fault is not detected.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electrical equipment
and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power
outlet:
.Equipment with high initial peak
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
.Other equipment requiring an
extremely stable power supply
such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
4-12 Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster
Instruments and Controls 4-13
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles per
hour (mph).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on
the driver's door to show the old
mileage reading.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
Fuel Gauge
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates how much fuel is
left in the tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
When the indicator nears empty, the
low fuel light comes on. There still is
a little fuel left, but the fuel tank
should filled soon.
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
.At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
.The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
4-14 Instruments and Controls
.The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature.
If the gauge pointer moves towards
the shaded area, the engine is
too hot.
This reading indicates the same
thing as the warning light. It means
that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating
on page 9‑21
for more
information.
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
When the vehicle is started this light
flashes and a chime may come on
to remind drivers to fasten their
safety belts. Then the light stays
on solid until the belt is buckled.
This cycle may continue several
times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the light nor chime come on.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
When the vehicle is started this light
flashes and a chime comes on to
remind passengers to fasten their
safety belt. Then the light stays on
solid until the belt is buckled. This
cycle continues several times if the
passenger remains or becomes
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving.
Instruments and Controls 4-15
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System
on
page 2‑25
.
The airbag readiness light comes
on solid and stays on for several
seconds when the vehicle is started.
Then the light goes out.
If it stays on solid after the vehicle
has been started or comes on while
driving, the airbag system may not
work properly. Have the vehicle
serviced right away.
{WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System
on page 2‑32
for
important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light the words ON and OFF for
several seconds as a system check.
4-16 Instruments and Controls
If you are using remote start,
if equipped, to start the vehicle from
a distance you may not see the
system check. Then, after several
more seconds, the status indicator
will light either the word ON or OFF
to let you know the status of the
right front passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator,
it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
{WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light
on page 4‑15
for more
information, including important
safety information.
Charging System Light
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
The light turns off when the
engine is started. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there could be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
This light and a Transport On
message display when the vehicle
is in Transport Mode. For more
information, see Key and Lock
Messages on page 4‑36.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Instruments and Controls 4-17
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
This light comes on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is
not running, as a check to show
it is working. If it does not, have
the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on
and stays on, while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of
the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This could
also result in a failure to
pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
4-18 Instruments and Controls
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
.Reduce vehicle speed.
.Avoid hard accelerations.
.Avoid steep uphill grades.
.If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected.
.Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank
on
page 8‑52
. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
.If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
.Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Specifications
on
page 8‑49
.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer/retailer
can check the vehicle. The dealer/
retailer has the proper test
equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have
developed.
Instruments and Controls 4-19
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
.The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine
running, or if the ignition is
placed in ON/RUN and the light
is not on.
.The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission
control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer/
retailer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
Brake System Warning
Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake
system is divided into two parts.
If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop the
vehicle. For good braking both parts
need to working.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have your brake
system inspected right away.
If the vehicle has antilock brakes,
this light should come on when the
key is placed in START. If it does
not, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
4-20 Instruments and Controls
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully.
The pedal may be harder to push or
it can go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. Try turning off
and restarting the vehicle one or
two times, if the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
on page 4‑21
and
Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑81.
{WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
Electric Parking Brake
Light
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), the park brake status
light comes on when the brake is
applied. If the light continues
flashing after the park brake is
released, or while driving, there is a
problem with the Electric Parking
Brake system. A Service Parking
Brake message can also display in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Brake System Messages
on
page 4‑33
for more information.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your
dealer/retailer.
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), the park brake
warning light should come on briefly
when ignition is placed in ON/RUN.
If it does not come on, then have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If this light comes on, there is a
problem with a system on the
vehicle that is causing the park
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be driven,
but should be taken to a dealer/
retailer as soon as possible. See
Parking Brake
on page 8‑32
for
more information.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,
this telltale displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) screen.
Instruments and Controls 4-21
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off.
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn off the vehicle.
Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the ABS light stays
on, or comes on again while driving,
the vehicle needs service. A chime
may also sound when the light
comes on steady.
If the ABS light is the only light on,
the vehicle has regular brakes, but
the antilock brakes are not
functioning.
If both lights are on, the vehicle's
antilock brakes are not functioning
and there is a problem with the
regular brakes. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑19
.
See Brake System Messages
on
page 4‑33
for all brake related DIC
messages.
Traction Off Light
This light comes on when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned off by pressing and
releasing the traction control button.
This light also comes on and the
system turns off if there is a problem
with the traction control system.
If the light comes on and stays on
for an extended period of time while
the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑34
and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)
on
page 8‑35
for more information.
4-22 Instruments and Controls
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on
while driving, there could be a
problem with the ESC and the
vehicle might need service. When
this warning light is on, the ESC is
off and does not limit wheel spin.
The light flashes if the system is
active and is working to assist the
driver with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,
this light is shown in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) screen.
See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
on page 8‑35
for more
information.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
This light comes on when the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is turned off. When the
ESC is off the Traction Control
System (TCS) is also off, wheel spin
is not limited. If the ESC is off, the
system does not assist in controlling
the vehicle. Switch on the TCS and
the ESC and the warning light
turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑34
and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)
on
page 8‑35
for more information
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire pressure
monitoring system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
Instruments and Controls 4-23
A tire pressure message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC),
can accompany the light. See Tire
Messages
on page 4‑37
for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the tire
loading information label. See Tire
Pressure
on page 9‑56
for more
information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
on page 9‑59
for more
information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
{WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer/retailer.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster
this telltale displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) screen.
4-24 Instruments and Controls
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light, below the fuel gauge,
comes on briefly when the engine is
started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working
normally the indicator light then
goes off.
This light also comes on when the
fuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel is
added the light should go off. If it
does not, have your vehicle
serviced.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,
this telltale displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) screen.
Security Light
This light flashes when the security
system is activated.
For more information, see Vehicle
Security on page 1‑13.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster
this telltale displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) screen.
High-Beam on Light
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
on page 5‑2
for more
information.
Instruments and Controls 4-25
Fog Lamp Light
For vehicles with fog lamps, this
light comes on when the fog lamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps
on page 5‑4
for more
information.
Taillamp Indicator Light
This light comes on when the
taillamps are in use.
Cruise Control Light
This light is white whenever the
cruise control is set and turns green
when the cruise control is active.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control
on page 8‑37
for more
information.
For vehicles with the uplevel cluster
this telltale will be shown in the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
screen.
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays information about the
vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
detected. See Vehicle Messages
on
page 4‑33
for more information.
All messages appear in the DIC
display located in the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
On some models, the DIC may have
some warning lights or indicators
shown in the top portion of the
display. See Warning Lights,
Gauges, and Indicators
on
page 4‑11
for more information.
The vehicle may also have features
that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization
on page 4‑38
for
more information.
4-26 Instruments and Controls
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using
the DIC buttons located on the turn
signal lever located on the left side
of the steering wheel. The DIC
displays trip, fuel, vehicle system
information, and warning messages
if a system problem is detected.
The bottom of the DIC display
shows what position the shift lever
is in, the odometer, and the direction
the vehicle is driving.
In cold weather the DIC display
may change slowly. This is normal
and will move more quickly as the
vehicle's interior temperature rises.
DIC Buttons
MENU: Press to get to the
Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu.
w x (Thumbwheel): Use to scroll
through the items in each menu.
A small marker will move across the
bottom of the page as you scroll
through the items. This shows
where each page is in the menu.
SET (Set/Clear): Press to set or
clear the menu item when it is
displayed.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until Trip/Fuel Information
Menu is displayed. Use w x to
scroll through the following menu
items:
.Digital Speedometer
.Trip 1
.Trip 2
.Fuel Range
.Average Fuel Economy
.Average Vehicle Speed
.Timer
.Turn-by-Turn
Digital Speedometer
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
per hour (mph). The speedometer
cannot be reset.
Instruments and Controls 4-27
Trip 1 and Trip 2
This display shows the current
distance traveled, in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since
the last reset for the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing SET while the trip
odometer display is showing.
Fuel Range
This display shows the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over
recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This display shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number is
calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
The fuel economy can be reset by
pressing SET while the Average
Fuel Economy display is showing.
Average Vehicle Speed
This display shows the average
speed of the vehicle in miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset of this value. The average
speed can be reset by pressing SET
while the Average Vehicle Speed
display is showing.
Timer
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press SET while
Timer is displayed. The display will
show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition
is off. Time will continue to be
counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
which the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press SET briefly
while Timer is displayed. To reset
the timer to zero, press and
hold SET.
Turn-by-Turn
This display is used for the OnStar
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
guidance. See OnStar
®
System
on
page 4‑43
or the Navigation
manual, if the vehicle has
navigation, for more information.
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until Vehicle Information Menu
is displayed. Use w x to scroll
through the following menu items:
.Unit
.Tire Pressure
.Remaining Oil Life
4-28 Instruments and Controls
Unit
Move w x to switch between
Metric or US when the Unit display
is active. Press SET to confirm
the setting. This will change the
displays on the cluster and DIC to
either metric or English (US)
measurements.
Tire Pressure
The display will show a vehicle with
the approximate pressures of all
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
in either kilopascal (kPa) or pounds
per square inch (psi). See Tire
Pressure Monitor System
on
page 9‑57
and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation
on page 9‑59
for more information.
Remaining Oil Life
This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life.
If Remaining Oil Life 99% is
displayed, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages
on
page 4‑35
. The oil should changed
as soon as possible. See Engine Oil
on page 9‑11
. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance
on
page 10‑2
for more information.
Remember, the Oil Life display must
be reset after each oil change. It will
not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the Oil Life display
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system press SET
while the Oil Life display is active.
See Engine Oil Life System
on
page 9‑13
.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Compass
on
page 4‑8
for more information.
Instruments and Controls 4-29
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{WARNING
If the HUD image is too bright or
too high in your field of view, it
may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is
dark outside. Be sure to keep the
HUD image dim and placed low in
your field of view.
For vehicles with the Head-Up
Display (HUD), some information
concerning the operation of the
vehicle is projected onto the
windshield. This includes the
speedometer reading, RPM reading,
transmission position, outside air
temperature, compass heading and
a brief display of the current radio
station, including XM information
or CD track. It will also display
turn-by-turn navigation information if
the vehicle has a navigation radio.
The images are projected through
the HUD lens located on the driver's
side of the instrument panel.
Notice: If you try to use the HUD
image as a parking aid, you may
misjudge the distance and
damage your vehicle. Do not use
the HUD image as a parking aid.
The tap shift gear will also appear
on the HUD if the vehicle has tap
shift and it is active.
The HUD information can be
displayed in one of three languages,
English, French, or Spanish. The
speedometer reading and other
numerical values can be displayed
in either English or metric units.
The language selection is changed
through the radio and the units of
measurement is changed through
the trip computer in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
AM-FM Radio
on page 6‑12
and
Driver Information Center (DIC)
on
page 4‑25
.
HUD Display on the Vehicle
Windshield
The HUD information appears as an
image focused out toward the front
of the vehicle.
When the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN, the HUD will display an
introductory message for a short
time, until the HUD is ready.
4-30 Instruments and Controls
The following indicator lights come
on the instrument panel when
activated and also appear on
the HUD:
.Turn Signal Indicators
.High-Beam Indicator Symbol
The HUD temporarily displays some
vehicle warnings, such as CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE and FUEL
LEVEL LOW when these messages
are on the DIC trip computer.
The HUD also displays the following
messages on vehicles with these
systems, when they are active:
.TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
.STABILITRAK ACTIVE
When the HUD is on, the
speedometer reading is continually
displayed. The current radio
station or CD track number will
display for a short period of time
after the radio or CD track status
changes. This happens whenever
radio information is changed.
The speedometer size is reduced
when radio, CD information,
warnings, or turn-by-turn navigation
information are displayed on
the HUD.
The HUD control is located to the
left of the steering wheel.
To adjust the HUD image so that
items are properly displayed, do the
following:
1. Adjust the driver's seat to a
comfortable position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Adjust the HUD controls.
Use the following settings to adjust
the HUD.
OFF: To turn HUD off, turn the HUD
dimming knob fully counterclockwise
until the HUD display turns off.
Brightness: Turn the dimming knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the display.
«(Up): ª(Down): Press the up
or down arrows to center the HUD
image in your view. The HUD image
can only be adjusted up and down,
not side to side.
PAGE: Press to select the display
formats. Release the page button
when the format number with the
desired display is shown on the
HUD. If vehicle messages are
displayed, pressing PAGE, may
clear the message.
Instruments and Controls 4-31
The three formats are as follows:
Format One: This display gives the
speedometer reading (in English or
metric units), turn signal indication,
high beam indication, transmission
positions, outside air temperature,
and compass heading.
Format Two: This display includes
the information in Format One
without the transmission
information, the outside air
temperature, and compass heading.
Format Three: This display
includes all the information in
Format One along with a circular
tachometer, but without outside air
temperature and compass heading.
All formats will show the
turn-by-turn navigation information
and provide details about the next
driving maneuver to be made.
When you near your destination,
the HUD will display a distance
bar that will empty the closer
you get to your destination.
4-32 Instruments and Controls
All navigation information is
provided to the HUD by the
navigation radio or OnStar
®
service, for vehicles that have
these features.
The HUD image displayed on the
windshield will automatically dim
and brighten to compensate for
outside lighting. However, the HUD
brightness control can still be
adjusted as needed.
The HUD image can temporarily
light up depending on the angle and
position of the sunlight on the HUD
display. This is normal and will
change when the angle of the
sunlight on the HUD display
changes.
Polarized sunglasses could make
the HUD image harder to see.
Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield
as needed to remove any dirt or film
that could reduce the sharpness or
clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,
clean cloth that has household glass
cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the
HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the lens
because the cleaner could leak into
the unit.
If You Cannot See the HUD
Image When the Ignition Is On
.Is anything covering the
HUD lens?
.Is the HUD dimmer setting bright
enough?
.Is the HUD image adjusted to
the proper height?
.Are you wearing polarized
sunglasses?
.Still no HUD image? Check the
fuse in the instrument panel fuse
block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 9‑44.
If the HUD Image Is Not Clear
.Is the HUD image too bright?
.Are the windshield and HUD
lens clean?
If the HUD image is not correct,
contact your dealer/retailer.
Keep in mind that the windshield is
part of the HUD system.
Instruments and Controls 4-33
Vehicle Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status of
the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the
driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one
after another.
Some messages may not require
immediate action, but you can press
SET to acknowledge that you
received the messages and to
clear them from the display. Some
messages cannot be cleared from
the DIC display because they are
more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember
that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem. You will find
the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information
about them grouped by subject in
the following information.
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
Battery Saver Active
This message displays when the
vehicle has detected that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
Low Battery
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 9‑27
for more information.
Service Battery Charging
System
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
Brake System Messages
Brake Fluid Low
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake
Fluid on page 9‑26.
Press Brake Pedal To Release
Park Brake
This message is displayed if you
attempt to release the electric
parking brake without the brake
pedal applied. See Parking Brake
on page 8‑32
for more information.
4-34 Instruments and Controls
Release Park Brake Switch
This message is displayed if the
electric parking brake is on while
the vehicle is in motion. Release it
before you attempt to drive. See
Parking Brake
on page 8‑32
for
more information.
Service Parking Brake
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the electric
parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 8‑32
for more information.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer.
Compass Messages
CAL
This message is displayed when the
compass needs to be calibrated.
See Compass on page 4‑8.
–––
Three dashes will be displayed if the
compass needs service. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Cruise Control Messages
Apply Brakes Before Cruise
If this message displays when
attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake and then try again.
Cruise Set to XXX
This message will display when the
cruise control is set and it will show
the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control
on page 8‑37
for more
information.
Door Ajar Messages
Driver Door Open
This message will display when the
driver door is open. Close the door
completely.
Hood Open
This message will display when
the hood is open. Close the hood
completely.
Left Rear Door Open
This message will display when the
driver side rear passenger door is
open. Close the door completely.
Passenger Door Open
This message will display when the
passenger door is open. Close the
door completely.
Right Rear Door Open
This message will display when the
passenger side rear passenger door
is open. Close the door completely.
Trunk Open
This message will display when the
trunk is open. Close the trunk
completely.
Instruments and Controls 4-35
Engine Cooling System
Messages
A/C Off Due to High
Engine Temp
This message displays when
the engine coolant becomes
hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain
on a hot engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns
back on. You can continue to
drive the vehicle.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
Coolant Level Low Add
Coolant
This message will display if the
coolant is low, see Engine Coolant
on page 9‑18
.
Engine Overheated —Idle
Engine
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
Engine Overheated —Stop
Engine
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
High Coolant Temperature
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot, see Engine
Overheating on page 9‑21.
Engine Oil Messages
Change Engine Oil Soon
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System
on
page 9‑13
and Driver Information
Center (DIC)
on page 4‑25
for
information on how to reset the
system. See Engine Oil
on
page 9‑11
and Scheduled
Maintenance
on page 10‑2
for
more information.
Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
Engine Oil Low –Add Oil
This message displays when the
engine oil level is too low. Check
the oil level. See Engine Oil
on
page 9‑11
.
4-36 Instruments and Controls
Oil Pressure Low –Stop
Engine
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Engine Power Messages
Engine Power Is Reduced
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message
is on, but maximum acceleration
and speed may be reduced.
Anytime this message stays on, the
vehicle should be taken to your
dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
Fuel System Messages
Fuel Level Low
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible.
Tighten Gas Cap
This message displays when the
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
Key and Lock Messages
No Remote Detected
This message displays when the
transmitter battery is weak on
vehicles with Keyless Access. See
“Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Battery”under “Remote Keyless
Transmitter Operation (Keyless
Access)”for more information.
Replace Battery In Remote Key
This message displays when the
battery in the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to
be replaced.
Transport Mode On
This message displays when the
ignition is held in START, or when
the START button is pressed for
15 seconds. The battery light may
also be flashing when this message
is displayed. To turn this message
off, start the vehicle and hold the
key in the START position, or press
the START button for 15 seconds.
Lamp Messages
AFL (Adaptive Forward
Lighting) Lamps Need Service
This message displays when the
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer/retailer.
See Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL)
on page 5‑3
for more
information.
Instruments and Controls 4-37
Ride Control System
Messages
Service Rear Axle
This message displays when there
is a problem with the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) System. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Service Traction Control
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Service StabiliTrak
This message displays if there is
a problem with the StabiliTrak
®
system. If this message appears, try
to reset the system. Stop; turn off
the engine for at least 15 seconds;
then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
Sport Mode On
This message displays when using
the selective ride control. See
Selective Ride Control
on
page 8‑36
for more information.
Traction Control Off
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is
turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
Theft Attempted
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
Tire Messages
Check XXX Tire Pressure or
Add Air To Tire
This message displays if the vehicle
detects low pressure in one or more
tires. The tire with the low pressure
will be shown in the message.
Check the tire pressures.
Service Tire Monitor System
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation
on
page 9‑59
for more information.
Tire Learning Active
This message displays when the
system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
on
page 9‑59
for more information.
4-38 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Messages
Service Transmission
This message displays if there is a
problem with the transmission. See
your dealer/retailer.
Shift To Park
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
attempting to remove the key from
the ignition if the vehicle is not in
P (Park).
Transmission Hot –Idle
Engine
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Window Messages
Open, Then Close Driver
Window
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you
will need to reprogram each front
window for the express up feature
to work. See Power Windows
on
page 1‑17
for more information.
Open, Then Close Passenger
Window
This message is displayed when the
window needs to be reprogrammed.
If the vehicle's battery has been
recharged or disconnected, you
will need to reprogram each front
window for the express up feature
to work. See Power Windows
on
page 1‑17
for more information.
Vehicle
Personalization
The audio system controls are used
to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features.
CONFIG (Configuration): Press
to access the Configuration
Settings Menu.
MENU / SELECT Knob: Press the
center of this knob to enter the
menus and select menu items.
Turn the knob to scroll through the
menus.
0BACK: Press to exit or move
backwards in a menu.
Instruments and Controls 4-39
Entering the Personalization
Menus
1. Press CONFIG to access the
Configuration Settings menu.
2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
to highlight Vehicle Settings.
3. Press the center of the
MENU / SELECT knob to select
the Vehicle Settings menu.
The following list of menu items will
be available:
.Climate and Air Quality
.Comfort and Convenience
.Collision/Detection Systems
.Language
.Lighting
.Power Door Locks
.Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
.Return to Factory Settings
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
highlight the menu. Press the knob
to select it. Each of the menus is
detailed in the following information.
Climate and Air Quality
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following will be
displayed:
.Auto Fan Control
.Air Quality Control
.Auto Heated Seats
.Remote Start Heated Seats
.Remote Start Cooled Seats
.Auto Defog
.Auto Rear Defog
Auto Fan Control
This will allow you to select the
automatic fan speed it can be
adjusted to run lower or higher
than normal.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Fan Control is
highlighted to open the menu.
Turn the knob to highlight High,
Medium, or Low. Press the knob to
confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu.
Air Quality Control
This will allow you to select the
whether the system will operate at
high or low sensitivity. Only vehicles
with the dual zone climate control
will have this option.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Air Quality Control is
highlighted to open the menu.
Turn the knob to highlight High or
Low. Press the knob to confirm the
selection and move back to the
last menu.
Remote Start Heated Seats
When on, this feature will turn the
heated seats on when using remote
start on cold days.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Start Heated Seats is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
4-40 Instruments and Controls
Remote Start Cooled Seats
When on, this feature will turn the
cooled seats on when using remote
start on warm days.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Start Cooled Seats is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Auto Defog
This will allow you to turn the auto
defog on or off. Only vehicles with
the dual zone climate control will
have this option.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Defog is highlighted to
open the menu. Turn the knob to
highlight On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu.
Auto Rear Defog
This will allow you to turn the auto
rear defog on or off. This feature will
automatically turn on the rear
defogger when it is cold outside.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Rear Defog is
highlighted to open the menu.
Turn the knob to highlight On or
Off. Press the knob to confirm the
selection and move back to the
last menu.
Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following will be displayed:
.Chime Volume
.Personalization by Driver
.Driver Seat Easy Exit
.Parking Tilt Mirrors
Chime Volume
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Chime Volume is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Normal or
High. Press the knob to confirm and
go back to the last menu.
Personalization by Driver
This allows the selection of if the
personalization settings are specific
to each driver or the same no matter
which key was used to enter and
start the vehicle.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Personalization by Driver is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Driver Seat Easy Exit
This allows you to turn the easy exit
seat feature on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Driver Seat Easy Exit is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Instruments and Controls 4-41
Park Tilt Mirrors
This allows you to turn the park tilt
mirrors feature on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Park Tilt Mirrors is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Driver &
Passenger or Off. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Collision/Detection Systems
Select the Collision/Detection
Systems menu and the following
will be displayed:
.Park Assist
Park Assist
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
Assist feature to be turned on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Park Assist is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select On or Off.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
Language
Select the Language menu and the
following will be displayed:
.English
.French
.Spanish
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
select the language. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Lighting
Select the Lighting menu and the
following will be displayed:
.Exit Lighting
.Vehicle Locator Lights
Exit Lighting
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Off,
30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
Vehicle Locator Lights
This allows the vehicle locator lights
to be turned on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Vehicle Locator Lights is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Power Door Locks
Select Power Door Locks and the
following will be displayed:
.Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
.Auto Door Unlock
.Delayed Door Lock
4-42 Instruments and Controls
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available and the door will lock as
programmed through this menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
select On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Delayed Door Lock
When on, this feature will delay
the locking of the doors until
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal delayed locking is in use.
Pressing either the power lock
button or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice will override
the delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all of the doors.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Delayed Door Lock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Auto Door Unlock
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
select All Doors, Driver Door,
or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
and the following will be displayed:
.Unlock Feedback (Lights)
.Locking Feedback
.Door Unlock Options
.Remote Vehicle Start
.Remote Recall
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Flash Lights or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Locking Feedback
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Locking Feedback is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
select Lights and Horn, Lights
Only, Horn Only, or Off. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Instruments and Controls 4-43
Door Unlock Options
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Door Unlock Options is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors or Driver Door Only. When
set to Driver Door Only, the driver
door will unlock the first time the
unlock button is pressed and all
doors will unlock when the button is
pressed a second time. When set to
All Doors, all of the doors will unlock
at the first press of the unlock
button. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Remote Vehicle Start
This allows the Remote Vehicle
Start to be turned on or off, if the
vehicle has this feature.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Vehicle Start is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Remote Recall
This allows the Remote Recall
feature to be turned on or off.
Remote Recall is when the
memorized settings will be recalled
as you unlock and enter the vehicle.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Recall is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select On or Off.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
Return to Factory Settings
Select Return to Factory Settings
to return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default
settings. Turn the knob to select Yes
or No. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
OnStar
®
System
OnStar
®
uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see
if you need help.
How OnStar Service Works
Q:This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
4-44 Instruments and Controls
]:Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.
X:Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation
and Hands‐Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all
OnStar services are available on
all vehicles. For more information
see the OnStar Owner's Guide or
visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or
TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or
press Qto speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all
times.
The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
an OnStar call center when Qis
pressed, ]is pressed, or if the
airbags or ACR system deploy.
This information usually includes
the vehicle's GPS location and, in
the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
Instruments and Controls 4-45
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing OnStar service at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls
on
page 4‑6
for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly.
Press Qand request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear
(no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
Press Qto confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement
on
page 12‑17
for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
4-46 Instruments and Controls
Universal Remote System
Programming
If the vehicle has this feature, you
will see these buttons with one
square Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light next to them in the
headliner.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Home Remote. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons”later in this
section.
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or
gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal
Home Remote System
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
Instruments and Controls 4-47
To program up to three devices:
1. Hold the end of your hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
(1 to 3 inches) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held
transmitter was supplied by the
manufacturer of your garage
door opener receiver
(motor-head unit).
2. At the same time, press and
hold both the hand-held
transmitter button and one of the
three Universal Home Remote
buttons to be used to operate
the garage door. Do not release
the Universal Home Remote
button or the hand-held
transmitter button until the
indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light.
You now may release both
buttons.
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming”later in this
section.
3. Press and hold for five seconds
the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button (selected
button from Step 2) while
observing the indicator light
and garage door activation.
.If the indicator light stays
on continuously or the
garage door starts to move
when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed
and released, then the
programming is complete.
There is no need to
continue programming
Steps 4 through 6.
.If the Universal Home
Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for
two seconds, then turns to
a constant light and the
garage door does not
move, continue with the
programming Steps 4
through 6.
It may be helpful to have
another person to assist
with the remaining Steps 4
through 6.
4-48 Instruments and Controls
“Learn”or “Smart”Buttons
4. After Steps 1 through 3 have
been completed, locate the
“Learn”or “Smart”button inside
the garage on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). The name and color of the
button may vary by
manufacturer.
5. Firmly press and release the
“Learn”or “Smart”button. After
you press this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 6.
6. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal
Home Remote button, selected
in Step 2 to control the garage
door, and then release it. If the
garage door does not move or
the lamp on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit) does not flash, press
and hold the same button a
second time for two seconds,
and then release it. Again, if
the door does not move or the
garage door lamp does not
flash, press and hold the
same button a third time for
two seconds, and then release.
The Universal Home Remote should
now activate the garage door.
To program the remaining
two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 1 of
“Programming the Universal
Home Remote System”.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call
1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be
long enough for Universal Home
Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
Instruments and Controls 4-49
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote”procedures,
regardless of where you live,
replace Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote”with the
following:
2. Continue to press and hold
the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release
every two seconds (cycle) the
hand-held transmitter button until
the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The
Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
“Programming Universal Home
Remote”to complete.
Universal Remote System
Operation
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Home Remote button
for at least half of a second. The
indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold down the
two outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Home Remote
Button
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Home Remote buttons:
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Home Remote button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 of the section
“Programming Universal Home
Remote”.
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call
1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com. You may also
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices on page 12‑3.
4-50 Instruments and Controls
2NOTES
Lighting 5-1
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-3
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fog Lamps .................... 5-4
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Battery Load Management . . . . 5-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 5-7
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The exterior lamp control is located
on the instrument panel on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
Turn the control to the following
positions:
O(Off): Turns off the exterior
lamps. The knob returns to the
AUTO position after it is released.
Turn to off again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
5-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns the exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
The current status of the AUTO
system is displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) uplevel
display. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑25.
;(Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
.Sidemarker Lamps
.Taillamps
.License Plate Lamps
.Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the
following:
.Sidemarker Lamps
.Taillamps
.License Plate Lamps
.Instrument Panel Lights
.Parking Lamps
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A warning chime sounds, if the
driver door is opened while the
ignition is off and the exterior lamps
are on.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
change lever away from you and
release, to turn the high beams on.
To return to low beams, push the
lever again or pull it towards you
and release.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high beam headlamps are on.
Flash-to-Pass
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever
towards you, and release.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system turns on the
low-beam headlamps at a reduced
brightness or for vehicles with
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the dedicated DRL
lights will come on when the
following conditions are met:
.The engine is running,
.The exterior lamp band is in
AUTO, and
.The light sensor determines it is
daytime.
Lighting 5-3
When the DRL are on, the
low-beam headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel lights and other
lamps will not be on.
The DRL turn off when the
headlamps are turned to Oor the
ignition is off.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When the exterior lamp control is
set to AUTO and it is dark enough
outside, the headlamps come on
automatically.
There is a light sensor located on
top of the instrument panel. Do not
cover the sensor or the headlamps
will come on when they are not
needed.
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
When it is bright enough outside
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to daytime running
lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to Oor the ignition
is off.
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
The Adaptive Forward Lighting
System (AFL) pivots the headlamps
horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. To enable
AFL, set the exterior lamp switch
to the AUTO position. Moving the
switch out of the AUTO position
deactivates the system. AFL
operates when the vehicle speed
is greater than 3 km/h (2 mph).
AFL does not operate when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
AFL is not immediately operable
after starting the vehicle; driving a
short distance is required to
calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 5‑1.
Hazard Warning Flashers
|Hazard Warning Flasher:
Press this button located on the
instrument panel below the climate
control system, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on
and off. Press again to turn the
flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers turn on
automatically if the airbags deploy.
5-4 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
The turn and lane‐change signal
can be turned off manually by
moving the lever back to its original
position.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
might be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on
page 9‑40
.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
button is located on the exterior
lamp control, on the outboard side
of the steering wheel.
To turn on the fog lamps, the ignition
and the headlamps or parking lamps
must be on.
If the fog lamps are turned on while
the exterior lamp switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlamps
come on automatically.
#:Press to turn on or off. An
indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on when the
fog lamps are on.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Lighting 5-5
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The brightness of the instrument
panel lighting and steering wheel
controls can be adjusted. Use the
thumbwheel located next to the
exterior lamps control on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
D:Move the thumbwheel up or
down to brighten or dim the lights.
Dome Lamps
The interior lamps control located in
the overhead console controls both
the front and rear interior lamps.
To operate, press the following
buttons:
*(Off): Turns the lamp off.
1Door: Turns the lamp on when
any door is opened.
+ON: Keeps the lamp on all
the time.
Reading Lamps
There are front and rear reading
lamps.
The front reading lamps are located
in the overhead console.
# $ :Press to turn each lamp on
or off.
Sun Visor Lamps
This lamp turns on when the cover
is opened.
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, reverse lamps, dome
lamps, and most of the interior lights
turn on briefly, when the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Kis pressed,
or when the door handle is pulled on
a Keyless Access Vehicle. See
Ignition Positions (Keyless Access)
on page 8‑18
or Ignition Positions
(Key Access)
on page 8‑19
. After
about 30 seconds the exterior lamps
turn off, and then the dome and
remaining interior lights will dim to
off. Entry lighting can be disabled
manually by changing the ignition
out of the OFF position, or by
pressing the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Qbutton.
5-6 Lighting
This feature can be activated or
deactivated in the menu SETTINGS
in the Info Display. Press CONFIG
on the infotainment system to call
up the menu. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑38.
Exit Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, parking
lamps, reverse lamps, and license
plate lamps come on at night, or in
areas with limited lighting, when the
key is removed from the ignition.
The dome lamps also come on
when the key is removed from the
ignition. The exterior lights and
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of
time, then automatically turn off.
For a vehicle with Keyless Access,
the exterior lights and dome lamps
automatically turn on when a door is
opened after the ignition is turned
off. See Ignition Positions (Keyless
Access)
on page 8‑18
or Ignition
Positions (Key Access)
on
page 8‑19
.
The exterior lights turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
lamps control to OFF.
The exit lighting feature can be
activated, deactivated, or the
timeframe for the lighting can be
changed in the menu Settings in the
Info. Display. Press CONFIG on the
Infotainment system to access the
menu. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 4‑38
.
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
Lighting 5-7
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays,
it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑25.
Battery Power Protection
The battery saver feature is
designed to protect the vehicle's
battery.
If the exterior lamps or any interior
light is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown
protection system automatically
turns the lamp off after about
10 minutes.
5-8 Lighting
2NOTES
Infotainment System 6-1
Infotainment
System
Introduction
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-2
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 6-3
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 6-19
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Mass Storage
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . 6-32
Rear Seat Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 6-42
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . . 6-58
Introduction
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
{WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could cause
a crash resulting in injury or
death to you or others. Do not
give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
.Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
6-2 Infotainment System
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 8‑3.
Notice: Contact your dealer/
retailer before adding any
equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP)
on page 8‑20
for more
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The theft-deterrent feature works
by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to
the infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved to a
different vehicle.
Infotainment System 6-3
Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O
.Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. FAV
.Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
C. Buttons 1 to 6
.Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
D. INFO
.Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
.CD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
E. TUNE
.Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
.CD: Selects tracks.
6-4 Infotainment System
F. CD/AUX
.Selects the CD player or an
external audio source.
G. g
.Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
.CD: Select the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
H. ZCD Eject
.Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
I. l
.Radio: Seeks the next
station.
.CD: Select the next track or
fast forwards within a track.
J. RADIO/BAND
.Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
.Selects the radio when
listening to a different audio
source.
K. Menu Knob
.Opens menus, highlights
menu items, or sets
numeric values while in
a menu.
L. SELECT
.Selects menu items.
M. CONFIG
.Opens the settings menu.
N. 0BACK
.Menu: Moves
one level back.
.Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
O. H
.Opens the clock menu.
P. TONE
.Opens the tone menu.
Q. 5
.Opens the phone
main menu.
.Mutes the audio system.
Infotainment System 6-5
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) A. VOL/ O
.Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. FAV
.Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
.MEM: Opens the
favorites list.
C. Buttons 1 to 6
.Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
.MEM: Saves and selects
favorite tracks and playlists.
D. INFO
.Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
.CD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
6-6 Infotainment System
E. TUNE/ k
.Manually selects radio
stations and pauses time
shifted content.
.CD/DVD: Select tracks,
pauses playback, and stops
playback.
.MEM: Select tracks and
pauses playback.
F. RADIO/BAND
.Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
.Selects the radio when
listening to a different audio
source.
G. g
.Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
.CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
.MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
H. ZCD Eject
.Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
I. REC O
.AUX: Records content from
audio CDs, MP3/WMA
CDs, and USB mass
storage devices.
J. DEL
.MEM: Deletes the current
track from MEM.
K. l
.Radio: Seeks the next
station.
.CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
.MEM: Selects the next
track or fast forwards within
a track.
L. SELECT
.Selects menu items.
M. Menu Knob
.Opens menus, highlights
menu items, or sets
numeric values while in
a menu.
N. 0BACK
.Menu: Moves one
level back.
.Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
O. TONE
.Opens the tone menu.
P. H
.Opens the clock menu.
Q. CONFIG
.Opens the settings menu.
Infotainment System 6-7
R. 5
.Opens the phone
main menu.
.Mutes the audio system.
S. MEM/DVD/AUX
.Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
USB, or a connected front
or rear auxillary audio
source.
Operation
Controls
The infotainment system is operated
by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, menus that are
shown on the display, and steering
wheel controls, if equipped.
Turning the System On or Off
VOL/ O(Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on and off.
Automatic Switch‐Off
If the infotainment system has
been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system will turn off
automatically after ten minutes.
Volume Control
VOL/ O(Volume/Power): Turn to
adjust the volume.
5(Phone/Mute): For vehicles
with OnStar
®
, press and hold 5to
mute the infotainment system.
Press and hold 5again, or turn
the VOL/ Oknob to cancel mute.
For vehicles without OnStar
®
,
press 5to mute the infotainment
system. Press 5again, or turn
the VOL/ Oknob to cancel mute.
Menu System
Controls
The Menu knob, SELECT button,
and the 0BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
Menu Knob: Turn to:
.Enter the menu system.
.Highlight a menu option.
.Select a value.
SELECT: Press to:
.Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
.Confirm a set value.
.Turn a system setting on or off.
0BACK: Press to:
.Exit a menu.
.Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
.Delete the last character in a
sequence.
6-8 Infotainment System
Selecting a Menu Option
1. Turn the Menu knob to move the
highlighted bar.
2. Press the SELECT button to
select the highlighted option.
Submenus
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
Activating a Setting
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the setting.
2. Press the SELECT button to
activate the setting.
Setting a Value
1. Turn the Menu knob to change
the current value of the setting.
2. Press the SELECT button to
confirm the setting.
Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the function.
2. Press the SELECT button to turn
the function on or off.
Entering a Character Sequence
1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the character.
2. Press the SELECT button to
select the character.
Infotainment System 6-9
Press the 0BACK button to delete
the last character in the sequence
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
3. Press and hold the SELECT
button until the value
changes to 0.
Press the 0BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select Treble, Midrange,
or Bass.
3. Select the value.
Press the 0BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select Fader or Balance.
3. Select the value.
Press the 0BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
6-10 Infotainment System
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
For vehicles that have an equalizer:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select EQ.
3. Select the setting.
Press the 0BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
Settings
For vehicles with DSP, it is used to
provide a choice of different
listening experiences.
The DSP settings for the Radio with
CD are:
.normal ‐Select this setting to
adjust the audio for stereo
mode. This provides the best
sound quality for the drivers seat
first, with the front passenger
second.
.hk surround ‐Select to enable
hk surround. This produces a
true 6.1 matrix surround from
any two channel digital source.
This feature is not available in
AM/FM radio mode.
The DSP settings for the Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM are:
.2.0 normal ‐Select this setting
to adjust the audio for stereo
mode. This provides the best
sound quality for the drivers seat
first, with the front passenger
second.
.hk surround ‐Select to enable
hk surround. This produces a
true 6.1 matrix surround from
any two channel digital source.
This feature is not available in
AM/FM radio mode.
To adjust the DSP settings:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select DSP.
3. Select the setting.
Press the 0BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Infotainment System 6-11
System Settings
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
5. Press the 0BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Auto Volume
The auto volume feature
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0BACK button to
go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Maximum Startup Volume
The maximum volume played when
the Radio with CD is first turned on
can be set.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
6-12 Infotainment System
Radio
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
RADIO / BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
Menu Knob: Turn to navigate the
available menus.
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song.
g/l:Press to search for
stations.
FAV: Press to open the favorites
list and select the favorites page.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
stations.
k(Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
RDS (Radio Data System)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
Radio Menus
Radio menus are available for AM
and FM.
Turn the menu knob to open the
main radio menu for that band.
Selecting a Band
Press the RADIO/BAND button
to choose AM, FM, or XM™,
if equipped. The last station that
was playing starts playing again.
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)
If the radio station is not known:
Briefly press gor l. To
automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
If the radio station is known:
Press and hold gor luntil the
station on the display is reached,
then release the button.
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
Briefly press gor l, to
automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
Infotainment System 6-13
Manual Tuning
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
frequency on the display.
Favorites List
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Favorites List.
3. Select the station.
Station Lists
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
receivable stations in the current
reception area are displayed. If a
station list has not been created,
an automatic station search
is done.
3. Select the station.
Category Lists
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program
type code depending on the
content. The system stores the
RDS stations sorted by program
type in the FM category list.
To search for a programming type
determined by station:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programming types available
displays.
3. Select the programming type.
A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
type displays.
4. Select the station.
The category lists are updated
when the station lists are
updated.
Updating Station & Category Lists
If stations stored in the station list
can no longer be received.
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
List, if the stations stored in
the station list are no longer
received. A station search will be
completed and the first station in
the updated list will play.
To cancel the station search, press
the SELECT button.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
6-14 Infotainment System
Storing Stations
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
Retrieving Stations
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
FM/AM content. While listening to
the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered.
Press the kbutton to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press
the kbutton again. The radio
is no longer live, but played from
the time shift buffer. A status bar
displays below the station number.
Press and hold the lor
gbuttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift
buffer. Hold luntil the end of
the recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Press and release the lor
gbuttons to jump forward or
back 30 seconds in the time shift
buffer.
When the radio station is
changed, the buffer is cleared
and automatically restarted for
the current station. Content from a
previously tuned station is no longer
available.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
If AM/FM is paused when the
vehicle is turned off, the radio
continues to buffer the current radio
station for up to 20 minutes. If the
vehicle is turned back on within
20 minutes, the radio resumes
playback from the paused point.
Infotainment System 6-15
Satellite Radio
Vehicles with an XM™Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has
a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required
to receive the XM service. For
more information, contact XM
at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the XM
radio are:
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
g/l:Press to go to the
previous or next channel.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
1 to 6: Press to select a favorite.
TUNE: Turn to select channel.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available
about the current song.
k(Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
Selecting the XM Band
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose between the AM, FM and
XM bands. The last channel played
in that band begins to play when
that band is selected.
XM Categories
XM channels are organized in
categories.
Removing or Adding Categories
Channels in a category that have
been removed can still be accessed
by using the gor lbuttons,
or the TUNE knob.
To add or remove categories:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select XM Categories.
4. Turn the Menu knob to highlight
the category.
5. Press the SELECT button to
remove or add the category.
Selecting an XM Channel
XM channels can be selected by
using g,l, the TUNE knob,
or the menu system.
6-16 Infotainment System
Selecting a Channel Using
gor l(Radio with CD)
.Press and release gor lto
go to the previous or next
channel.
.Press and hold gor lto
scroll through the previous or
next channel until the channel is
reached.
Selecting a Channel Using
gor l(Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
Press and release gor lto go to
the previous or next channel.
Selecting a Channel Using the
TUNE Knob
To select an XM channel using the
TUNE knob:
Turn the TUNE knob to highlight an
XM channel, the channel is selected
after a short delay.
To select a channel using the menu:
1. Turn the menu knob and select
Channel List.
2. Select the desired channel.
Selecting a Channel Using the
Menu System
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select XM Category List.
3. Select the category.
4. Select the channel.
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
Channels from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
Up to six channels can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Storing a Channel as a Favorite
To store the channel to a position
in the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1to 6 button until the
channel can be heard again.
Retrieving Channels
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to change to
another favorite page. Briefly press
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
the channel.
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
XM content. While listening to the
radio, the content from the current
channel is always being buffered.
Press the kbutton to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
Infotainment System 6-17
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press the
kbutton again. The radio is no
longer live, but played from the time
shift buffer. A status bar displays
below the channel number.
Press and hold the lor
gbuttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift
buffer. Hold luntil the end of
the recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Press and release the lor
gbuttons to go to the next or
previous song in the time shift
buffer.
When the channel is changed, the
buffer is cleared and automatically
restarted for the current channel.
Content from a previously tuned
station is no longer available.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
Pausing XM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
If XM is paused when the vehicle is
turned off, the radio continues to
buffer the current radio station for
up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is
turned back on within 20 minutes,
the radio resumes playback from the
paused point.
XM Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, no
action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data, no action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavailable: This
previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
No Artist Info: The system is
working properly. No artist
information is available at this
time on this channel.
No Title Info: The system is
working properly. No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel.
No CAT Info: The system is
working properly. No category
information is available at this time
on this channel.
No Information: The system is
working properly. No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel.
6-18 Infotainment System
No XM Signal: The system is
working properly. The vehicle may
be in a location that where the XM
signal is being blocked. When the
vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
CAT Not Found: The system is
working properly. There are no
channels available for the selected
category.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/
retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/
retailer.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
FM
FM signals only reach about
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).
Although the radio has a built-in
electronic circuit that automatically
works to reduce interference, some
static can occur, especially around
tall buildings or hills, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
Infotainment System 6-19
XM™Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on. This
interference can cause an increased
level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
with the rear window defogger,
located in the rear window. Make
sure that the inside surface of the
rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio
reception, the antenna connector
needs to be properly attached to the
post on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between
the grid lines to attach a cellular
telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or
sharp object to clear the inside
rear window can damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or
distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
your backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Satellite Radio Antenna
For vehicles with XM™satellite
radio service, the antenna is located
on the roof of the vehicle. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
6-20 Infotainment System
Audio Players
CD Player
The CD player can play audio CDs
and MP3 CDs.
The CD player will not play
8 cm (3 in.) CDs.
Care of CDs
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it.
Wipe the disc from the center to
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add a label to a disc, as
it could get caught in the CD
player. If a label is needed, label
the top of the recorded disc with
a marking pen.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the CD
player are:
CD / AUX: Press to use the CD
player.
l/g:Press to select tracks or
to fast forward or rewind within a
track.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the current track
that may be available.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
Menu Knob: Turn to enter
the menu.
Infotainment System 6-21
SELECT: Press to select an item.
Z(Eject): Press to eject the disc.
Inserting a CD
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the CD slot until it
is drawn in.
Removing a CD
Press the Zbutton.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Press the CD/AUX button if there is
a disc in the player, it begins
playing.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Selecting a CD Track
Using the control buttons:
.Press the gor lbutton to
select the previous or next track.
.Turn the TUNE knob.
Using the CD Menu:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Tracks list.
3. Select the track.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Turn the menu knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press and hold lor gto fast
forward or rewind within the current
track.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Using the control buttons:
.Press the gor lbutton to
select the previous or next track.
.Turn the TUNE knob.
Using the CD Menu:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Playlists / Folders.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
6-22 Infotainment System
Searching for MP3 Tracks
The search feature may take some
time to display the information after
reading the disc due to the amount
of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the
disc is being read.
Tracks can be searched by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Genres
.Folder View
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
CD/DVD Player
The CD/DVD player can play
CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,
MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.
The CD/DVD player will not play
8 cm (3 in.) discs.
Care of CDs and DVDs
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
the disc from the center to the
outer edge.
Care of the CD/DVD Player
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label the
top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD/DVD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Infotainment System 6-23
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
CD/DVD player are:
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX.
l/g:Press to select tracks or
to fast forward or rewind within a
track.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the disc that may
be available.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
Menu Knob: Turn to enter
the menu.
SELECT: Press to select an item.
Z(Eject): Press to eject the disc.
k:Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,
or DVD‐V, press again to resume
playback. Press and hold to stop a
DVD‐V disc.
Inserting a CD or DVD
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the slot until it is
drawn in.
Removing a CD or DVD
Press the Zbutton.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD/DVD slot.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
if there is a disc in the player, it
begins playing.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks
Using the control buttons:
.Press the gor lbutton to
select the previous or next track.
.Turn the TUNE knob.
Using the menu:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Tracks List.
3. Select the track.
Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
Press the kbutton to pause a CD
or DVD‐A track. Press the kbutton
again to continue playing the track.
Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
Random Order
Turn the menu knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press and hold lor gto fast
forward or rewind within the current
track.
6-24 Infotainment System
Playing an MP3 CD or DVD
Files that are not stored in
folders are displayed in the root
directory (disc).
The search rate increases if the
menu knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Using the control buttons:
.Press gor lto select the
previous or next track.
.Turn the TUNE knob.
Using the CD or DVD Menu:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
4. Select the track.
Searching for MP3s on a CD
or DVD
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. The infotainment
system automatically switches to
FM while the disc is being read.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Tracks can be searched for by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Genres
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
Order
Turn the menu knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On.
Recording an Audio or MP3
CD to MEM
See Mass Storage Media (MEM)
on
page 6‑25
for more information.
Playing a DVD‐V
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
on page 6‑34
for
information about how to control a
Video DVD using the wireless
remote control.
Infotainment System 6-25
Selecting a Chapter
Using the control buttons:
.Press gor lto select the
previous or next chapter.
.Turn the TUNE knob.
Using DVD Menu:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Chapter List.
3. Select the chapter.
Selecting a Title
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Title List.
3. Select the title.
Changing the Audio Stream
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Audio Stream.
3. Select Change Audio Stream.
4. Press SELECT to change the
selection.
Select Cancel to exit the menu.
Pausing a DVD
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Pause, to pause the
disc. Select unpause to start
playback.
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu
Use the following actions to
navigate the title menu on a
DVD‐V Disc.
.Select / Enter
.Cursor UP
.Cursor DOWN
.Cursor RIGHT
.Cursor LEFT
.Up Menu
Use the following actions to
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V
Disc while playing chapters.
.Pause (Play)
.Chapter List
.Title List
.DVD/DVD
.DVD/AUX
.AUX/DVD
.AUX/AUX
To navigate the menu:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select the action.
Mass Storage
Media (MEM)
Infotainment systems with MEM
storage are able to record up to
1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
and USB storage devices. The MEM
player can also time shift audio from
AM, FM, and XM™radio.
Music or content that is stored in
MEM that you did not create,
or have the right to distribute, must
be deleted before the sale or end of
the lease of the vehicle.
6-26 Infotainment System
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
MEM player are:
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select
the MEM player.
l/g:Press to select tracks or
to fast forward or rewind within a
track.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the MEM track
that may be available.
k/TUNE : Press to pause the
track currently playing, press again
to resume playback. Turn to select
tracks.
OREC: Press to record music
from a CD or USB drive.
DEL: Press to delete the current
track from MEM.
FAV (Favorites): Press to display
MEM favorites.
1 to 6: Press to select a track or
playlist stored in that numeric
position.
Recording From Audio CDs
The infotainment system can record
the current song playing or all songs
from an audio CD to MEM. A status
bar appears on the top of the
display when the recording process
starts and disappears when the
process has ended. Copy protected
CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
Recording to MEM
Press OREC, then select Record
Current Song or Record All Songs
on Disc. If the track has started
playing, the system will restart the
track and begin recording from the
beginning of the track. When the
song recording is completed, the
message Song Recorded to MEM
displays, and there may be a slight
pause.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored
as the current date, disc and track
number.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
If the disc or track has already been
recorded to MEM, the message
The Song(s) is Already Recorded
displays.
Stopping the Recording
Press the OREC button while
recording from an audio CD to
display the stop recording option.
Select Stop Recording Song
to MEM.
Renaming Recorded Discs
Discs that have been recorded to
MEM can be renamed.
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
3. Select the disc.
4. Select Album or Artist to rename
either one.
5. Use the menu knob to enter
the character sequence. See
Operation
on page 6‑7
for
more information.
Infotainment System 6-27
Recording From MP3/WMA
Discs or USB Storage Devices
USB Host Support
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
USB Supported Devices
.USB Flash Drives
.Portable USB Hard Drives
Recording to MEM
Press OREC, then select Record
Current Song or Record Current
Folder.
The information stored by MEM is
titled according to the ID3 tag
associated with it.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
If the disc or track has already been
recorded to MEM, the message
The Song(s) is Already Recorded
displays.
Stopping the Recording
Press the OREC button while
recording from an MP3/WMA CD or
USB storage device to display the
stop recording option. Select Stop
Recording Song to MEM.
Deleting Tracks From MEM
Individual tracks and all tracks can
be deleted from MEM.
To delete individual tracks, press
and release the DEL button while
the track is playing.
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.
Playing From MEM
Playing Back a Previously
Recorded CD
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track if MEM is already playing from
the previously recorded disc.
1. Select Recorded Disc List.
2. Select the disc.
3. Select the track.
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Genres
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
6-28 Infotainment System
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Shuffle Songs
Select the Shuffle Songs option
from the MEM menu to randomly
play back tracks stored in MEM.
Configuring MEM Favorites
During MEM playback, press the
FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite
categories are:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Genres
To remove MEM favorites
categories:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select MEM Favorites.
4. Remove the check mark from
the box to remove that MEM
favorites category.
Replace the check mark to re-add
the removed category.
Saving MEM Tracks as
Favorites
Favorites can be saved by
pressing and holding one of
the 1 to 6 buttons. Favorites
can be stored according to the
following list:
Playlist: Adds currently playing
track to the playlist selected.
Artist: Saves the artist associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
Album: Saves the album
associated with the currently playing
track in the indicated favorites
position.
Genre: Saves the genre associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
Creating Playlists
To create a playlist using tracks
stored in MEM:
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorites.
2. Select the track to be stored in
the playlist.
3. Press and hold one of the
1 to 6 buttons until the track can
be heard again to store the
track.
4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store
additional tracks in the playlist.
Infotainment System 6-29
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack or the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 6‑7.
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
3.5 mm Jack
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
Adjusting the Volume
Turn the VOL/ Oknob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
USB Port
For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
.iPod's
.PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
.USB Drives
.Zune's
Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives,
and Zune's are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
Connecting an iPod
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Podcasts
.Genres
.Audiobooks
.Composers
6-30 Infotainment System
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle
Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off, then
press the 0BACK button to return
the main screen.
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order.
Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
Repeat
Turn the menu knob and set
Repeat to On or Off, then press
the 0BACK button to return the
main screen.
On: Repeats the current track.
Off: Playback starts from the
beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune™
Connecting a PFD or Zune
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port.
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Podcasts
.Genres
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle Functionality
Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Repeat Functionality
Turn the menu knob and set Repeat
to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Infotainment System 6-31
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device.
When a device is not supported, the
message “No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device”appears.
Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Searching For a Track
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
Tracks can be searched for by:
.Playlists*
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Genres
.Folder View
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle Functionality
Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs (Random) to On or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Repeat Functionality
Turn the menu knob and set Repeat
to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
6-32 Infotainment System
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD/DVD and MEM)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to be connected
using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) input jack
or the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 6‑7.
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
3.5 mm Jack
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
Adjusting the Volume
Turn the VOL/ Oknob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
USB Port
The following devices may be
connected to the USB port and
controlled by the infotainment
system.
.iPod's
.USB Mass Storage Devices
Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
Connecting an iPod
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Selecting a Track
Using the control buttons:
.Press gSEEK or lSEEK to
select the previous or next track.
.Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track in the current sub menu.
The track will start to play.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle
Songs to On or Off.
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Infotainment System 6-33
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Genres
.Composers
.Audiobooks
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
Composers, or Audiobooks.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Files that are not stored in
folders are displayed in the root
directory (USB).
Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Disconnecting a USB Drive
A USB drive should be ejected from
the USB port before disconnecting
it. To eject a USB drive:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select USB Eject.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Turn the menu knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On.
Selecting a Track
Using the control buttons:
.Press gor lto select the
previous or next track.
.Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track in the current sub menu.
The track will start to play.
Selecting a track in a different
folder:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
4. Select the track.
Searching for Tracks
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
6-34 Infotainment System
Tracks can be searched by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Song Titles
.Genres
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Recording Tracks to MEM
See Mass Storage Media (MEM)
on
page 6‑25
for more information.
Rear Seat
Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle's infotainment system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio
with a DVD player, two rear seat
video display screens, audio/video
jacks, two wireless headphones,
and a remote control. See CD/DVD
Player
on page 6‑22
or the
separate navigation system manual
for more information on the vehicle's
DVD system.
Before Driving
The RSE is for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving.
In severe or extreme weather
conditions, the RSE system may not
work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F)
and below 60°C (140°F). If the
temperature is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until it is
within the operating range.
Global Off
Depending on the infotainment
system, the RSE system may have
a Global Off feature. The Global Off
feature disables all RSE system
features. Press and hold the radio
power button for more than
three seconds for Global Off to
disable the RSE features. On some
infotainment systems, the Global
Off feature can be turned off by
performing one of the following:
.Press and hold the radio power
button for more than
three seconds.
.Insert or eject any disc.
.Insert a DVD video disc.
Infotainment System 6-35
.Press the Remote Control power
button.
.Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
or the kbutton when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
.Press the SRC button on the
steering wheel when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
.Cycle the ignition.
Headphones
RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the DVD player, and
Channel 2 is dedicated to any
external auxiliary device connected
to the A/V jacks. The headphones
are used to listen to various
multi‐media. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button,
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
control. Turn the headphones off
when not in use.
Push the On/Off button to turn on
the headphones. A light on the
headphones comes on. If the light
does not come on, check the
batteries. Intermittent sound or static
can also indicate weak batteries.
See “Battery Replacement”later in
this section for more information.
Infrared transmitters are on the top
of the left seatback video screen.
The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system is shut off
or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters for more
than three minutes. Moving too far
forward or stepping out of the
vehicle, can cause the headphones
to lose the signal or have static.
The headphones may automatically
turn off after four hours of
continuous use.
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume
control.
For best audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly,
with the headband over the top of
the head. L (Left) and R (Right)
are above the ear pads and
are indicators as to how the
headphones should be placed on
the head.
Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not
be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool, dry
place.
If the foam ear pads become worn
or damaged, they can be replaced
separately from the headphones.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
6-36 Infotainment System
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries:
1. Loosen the screw to the battery
door located on the left side of
the headphones.
2. Slide the battery door open.
3. Replace the two AAA batteries.
4. Replace the battery door and
tighten the screw.
Remove the batteries if the
headphones are not going to be
used for a long period of time.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
If available, the A/V jacks are
located on the rear of the floor
console. They allow audio or video
cables to be connected from an
auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
The A/V jacks are color coded:
.Yellow for video input.
.White for left audio input.
.Red for right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system:
1. Connect the auxiliary device
cables to the A/V jacks.
2. Power on both the auxiliary
device and the RSE video
screen.
Changing the Source on the Video
Display Screens
The image from the auxiliary device
can be switched between the video
display screens.
To change the display:
1. Press the AUX button on the
remote control to change the
source of both video screens
from the DVD player to the
auxiliary device.
2. Press the AUX button a second
time to change the left video
screen source to the DVD player
and the right video screen to the
auxiliary device.
3. Press the AUX button a third
time to change the left video
screen source to the auxiliary
device and the right video
screen to the DVD player.
4. Press the AUX button a fourth
time to change the source of
both video screens to the DVD
player.
How to Change the RSE Video
Screen Settings
The screen display mode,
brightness, and language can be
changed from the setup menu using
the remote control. To change a
setting:
1. Press z.
2. Use n,q,p,oand rto
select the settings.
3. Press zagain to exit the
setup menu.
Infotainment System 6-37
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following:
.Wireless Headphones
.Vehicle Speakers
The RSE system transmits the
audio signal to the wireless
headphones if an audio signal is
available. See “Headphones”earlier
in this section for more information.
The front seat passengers are
able to listen to playback from
the A/V jacks through the vehicle
speakers by selecting Rear A/V as
the source on the radio.
Video Screens
The video screens are located in
the back of the driver and front
passenger seats.
To use the video screen:
1. Push the release button located
on the seatback console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
viewing position.
Push the video screen down into its
locked position when it is not in use,
the screen turns off automatically.
Only the left RSE seatback console
contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones, they may
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs.
These LEDs are not on the right
video screen. Both seatback
consoles contain an infrared
receiver for the remote control.
They are located at the top of each
console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen”later in this section for
more information.
Video Screen Input Jack
Each video screen is equipped
with a video input jack to allow
video cables to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
This signal will override any video
provided by the RSE system; either
the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack
source. The RSE system must be
on for this input to operate.
6-38 Infotainment System
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at
the transmitter window at either
seatback console and press the
button. Direct sunlight or very bright
light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
from the remote control. Check
the batteries if the remote control
does not seem to be working. See
“Battery Replacement”later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of
sight could also affect the function
of the remote control.
If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
Radio DVD slot, the remote control
Obutton can be used to turn on the
video screen display and start the
disc. The infotainment system can
also turn on the video screen
display. See CD/DVD Player
on
page 6‑22
or the separate
navigation system manual for more
information.
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
O(Power): Press to turn the
video screens on and off.
P(Illumination): Press to turn the
remote control backlight on. The
backlight times out after several
seconds if no other button is
pressed.
v(Title): Press to return to the
main menu of the DVD. This
function could vary for each disc.
y(Main Menu): Press to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the
cursor. After making a selection
press the enter button. This button
only operates when using a DVD.
n,q,p,o(Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
r(Enter): Press to select the
highlighted choice in any menu.
z(Display Menu): Press to
adjust the brightness, screen
display mode, and display the
language menu.
q(Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
c(Stop): Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
s(Play/Pause): Press to start
playing a DVD. Press to pause a
DVD while it is playing. Press again
to continue playing.
Infotainment System 6-39
Depending on the infotainment
system in the vehicle, DVD
playback may be slowed down by
pressing sthen [. Reverse slow
play by pressing sthen r. Press
sagain to cancel slow play.
t(Previous Track/Chapter):
Press to go to the start of the
current track or chapter. Press
again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
u(Next Track/Chapter): Press
to go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
r(Fast Reverse): Press to
quickly reverse the DVD or CD.
To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press s. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release r. This
button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
[(Fast Forward): Press to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
e(Audio): Press to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
{(Subtitles): Press to turn
ON/OFF subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
the video display between the DVD
player and an auxiliary source.
d(Camera): Press to change the
camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature when the DVD is
playing.
\(Clear) (If Available): Press this
button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to
clear all numeric inputs.
}10 (Double Digit Entries)
(If Available): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers
greater than 9. Press this button
before inputting the number.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numbered keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
6-40 Infotainment System
Replacing the Remote Control
If the remote control becomes lost
or damaged, a new universal
remote control can be purchased.
Use a Toshiba
®
code set for
replacement universal remote
controls.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control
batteries:
1. Slide back the rear cover on the
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
Remove the batteries from the
remote control if unused for an
extended period of time.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might not be turned to
ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen.
There are black borders on the top
and bottom or on both sides or it
looks stretched out.
Check the display mode settings in
the setup menu by pressing the
display menu button on the remote
control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves
or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push
Play but sometimes the DVD starts
where I left off and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was pressed
one time, the DVD player resumes
playing where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of
the DVD.
Infotainment System 6-41
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
Problem Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is running but
there is no picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen
is in the auxiliary source mode by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices.
Sometimes the wireless headphone
audio cuts out or buzzes.
Check for obstructions, low
batteries, reception range, and
interference from cellular telephone
towers or by using a cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are
on correctly using the L (left) and
R (right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are
positioned properly with the
headband across the top of
the head.
I lost the remote and/or the
headphones.
See your dealer/retailer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen
is sourced to the DVD player by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
has. The video screen may display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error or
Mechanical Error: There are disc
load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error or Unknown
Format: The disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
The disc is not from a correct
region.
No Disc Inserted: No disc is
present when the ZEJECT or
MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
on the radio.
6-42 Infotainment System
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one of
these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar
®
System.
Cleaning the RSE Seatback
Console
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE
seatback console surface.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
touching or cleaning the screen as
damage could result.
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview)
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The
infotainment system and voice
recognition are used to control the
system. The system can be used
while the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of
the Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support
all functions and not all phones work
with the Bluetooth system. See
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information about compatible
phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system.
Steering Wheel Controls
b/g(Push To Talk): Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
voice recognition.
$/c(Mute/End Call): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
Infotainment System Controls
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 6‑7
.
5(Phone): Press to enter the
Phone main menu.
Voice Recognition
The voice recognition system uses
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Infotainment System 6-43
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and
overrides the audio system. Use
the VOL/ Oknob during a call to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. The system
maintains a minimum volume level.
Other Information
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement
on
page 12‑17
for FCC information.
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls)
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 6‑7
.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used.
See the cell phone manufacturer
user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a
Bluetooth phone is not connected,
calls will be made using OnStar
®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available.
Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide
for more information.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Pairing Information:
.Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone in the order the phone
was paired.
.Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
To link to a different paired phone,
see “Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
6-44 Infotainment System
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four digit PIN number appears
on the display.
5. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Locate the device named
“General Motors”in the list on
the cell phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four digit PIN number
provided by the system.
6. The system prompts for a name
for the phone and confirms the
name provided. This name is
used to indicate which phone is
connected.
7. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired”after the
pairing process is complete.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair
additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the phone to delete and
follow the on screen prompts.
Linking to a Different Phone
To link to a different phone, the new
phone must be in the vehicle and
available to be connected to the
bluetooth system before the process
is started.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the new phone to link to
and follow the on screen
prompts.
If delete is selected, the
highlighted phone will be
deleted.
Making a Call
Radio with CD
1. Press the 5button twice.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence”in Operation
on
page 6‑7
for more information.
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Infotainment System 6-45
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
1. Press the 5button.
2. Select Enter number.
3. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Sequence”in Operation
on
page 6‑7
for more information.
4. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Accepting or Declining a Call
When a call is received, the
infotainment system mutes and a
ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Accepting a Call
Turn the menu knob to Answer and
press the SELECT button.
Declining a Call
Turn the menu knob to Decline and
press the SELECT button.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Accepting a Call
Turn the menu knob to Answer and
press the SELECT button.
Declining a Call
Turn the menu knob to Decline and
press the SELECT button.
Switching Between Calls
(Call Waiting Calls Only)
To switch between calls:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
Conference Calling
Conference calling and three way
calling must be supported on the
bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
To start a conference while in a
current call:
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select Enter Number.
3. Enter the character sequence
then select call. See “Entering
a Character Sequence”in
Operation
on page 6‑7
for
more information.
4. After the call has been placed,
turn the menu knob button and
choose Merge Calls.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat
steps 1 through 4. The amount
of callers that can be added are
limited by your wireless service
carrier.
6-46 Infotainment System
Ending a Call
Turn the menu knob and select
Hang Up.
Muting a Call
To Mute a Call
Turn the menu knob and select
Mute Call.
To Cancel Mute
Turn the menu knob and select
Mute Call.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system.
1. Turn the menu knob and select
Enter Number.
2. Enter the character sequence,
see “Entering a Character
Sequence”in Operation
on
page 6‑7
for more information.
Bluetooth
(Voice Recognition)
Pairing
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar
®
Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Pairing Information:
.Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone in the order the phone
was paired.
.Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information changes or
the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
Infotainment System 6-47
Pairing a Phone
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
PIN number. The PIN number
will be used in Step 4.
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Locate the device named
“General Motors”in the list on
the cell phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four‐digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name
for the phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phone is
connected. The system confirms
the name.
6. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired”after the
pairing process is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all
the paired Bluetooth devices.
The system will respond “is
connected”if a phone is
connected to the vehicle.
6-48 Infotainment System
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
which phone to delete followed
by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to
be deleted. If the phone name
is unknown, use the “List”
command for a list of all paired
phones. The system responds
“Would you like to delete
<phone name>? Yes or No”,
followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes”to delete the phone.
The system responds “OK,
deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The
system responds “Please wait
while I search for other phones”.
.If another phone is found,
the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected”.
.If another phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to
thirty phone numbers as name
tags that are shared between the
Bluetooth and OnStar systems.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
.Store
.Digit Store
.Directory
Infotainment System 6-49
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone
number to be stored without
entering the digits individually.
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system
responds “Store, number
please”, followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number
to be stored at once with no
pauses.
.If the system recognizes
the number, the response is
“OK, Storing”.
.If the system does not
recognize the phone
number, the response is
“Store <Phone number>”.
“Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say
“Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number again.
4. After the system stores the
phone number, it responds
“Please say the name tag”,
followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds “About to store
<name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No”and
repeat Step 5.
.If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes”and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
6-50 Infotainment System
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a
phone number to be stored by
entering the digits individually.
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system
responds with “Please say the
first digit to store”, followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored.
The system will repeat back the
digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
number to be stored is complete.
.If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear”at any time to
clear the last number.
.To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify”at any time.
4. After the complete number has
been entered, say “Store”. The
system responds “Please say
the name tag”, followed by
a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds “About to store
<name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.If the name tag does not
sound correct, say “No”and
repeat Step 5.
.If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes”and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
Infotainment System 6-51
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of
the name tags stored by the system.
To use the directory command:
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system
responds “Directory”and lists all
stored name tags. The system
returns to the main menu when
the list is complete.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following
commands to delete name tags:
.Delete
.Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command is used to
delete specific name tags.
To delete name tags:
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system
responds “Delete, please say
the name tag”, followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
The system responds “Would
you like to delete, <name tag>?
Please say yes or no”.
.If the name tag is correct,
say “Yes”to delete the
name tag. The system
responds with “OK, deleting
<name tag>, returning to
the main menu.”
.If the name tag is incorrect,
say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let's
try again, please say the
name tag.”
6-52 Infotainment System
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command
The Delete All Name Tags
command deletes all stored phone
book name tags and route name
tags for OnStar, if stored.
To delete all name tags:
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The
system responds “You are about
to delete all name tags stored in
your phone directory and your
route destination directory. Are
you sure you want to do this?
Please say yes or no.”
.Say “Yes”to delete all
name tags.
.Say “No”to cancel the
function and return to the
main menu.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the
following commands:
.Dial
.Digit Dial
.Call
.Re‐dial
Using the Dial Command
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Dial using <phone name>.
“Number please”, followed by
a tone.
Infotainment System 6-53
3. Say the entire number without
pausing.
.If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing”and dials
the number.
.If the system does not
recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Dialing”and dials the
number. If the number is
not correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number again.
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system
responds “Digit dial using
<phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial”, followed by
a tone.
3. Say the digits to be dialed one at
a time. The system repeats back
the digit it heard followed by
a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the
number to be dialed is complete.
After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The
system responds “OK, Dialing”
and dials the number.
.If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear”at any time to
clear the last number.
.To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify”at any time.
6-54 Infotainment System
Using the Call Command
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds
“Call using <phone name>.
Please say the name tag”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag of the person
to call.
.If the system recognizes
the name tag it responds
“OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number.
.If the system does not
recognize the name tag, it
confirms the name tag
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, calling, <name
tag>”and dials the number.
If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
name tag again.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The
system responds “Re‐dial using
<phone name>”and dials the
last number called from the
connected Bluetooth phone.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Infotainment System 6-55
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
.Press bgto answer the call.
.Press c/$to ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier.
.Press bgto answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
.Press bgagain to return to the
original call.
.To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
.Press c/$to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Three‐Way Calling
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press bg. The
system responds with “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three‐way call”.
The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please
say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press bgto link all the callers
together.
Ending a Call
Press c/$to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
To Mute a call
1. Press bg. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
responds “Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press bg. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
The system responds
“Resuming call”.
6-56 Infotainment System
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell
Phone
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press bg. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.”The system
responds “Transferring call”and
the audio transfers to the cell
phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
For vehicles without a navigation
system, press bgduring a call
with the audio on the cell phone, the
audio transfers to the vehicle.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, press bgduring a call
with the audio on the cell phone.
If the audio does not transfer to the
vehicle, use the audio transfer
feature on the cell phone. See the
cell phone manufacturers user guide
for more information.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
voice recognition commands on the
cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
1. Press b/g.
.For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
.For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>”.
.The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.
Infotainment System 6-57
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers and the numbers
stored as name tags during a call.
Use this feature when calling a
menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can also be stored for use.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press bg. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Say a number to send tones”,
followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
.If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
“OK, Sending Number”and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
.If the system does not
recognize the number, it
responds “Dial Number,
please say yes or no?”,
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Sending Number”and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press bg. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.”The
system responds “Say a name
tag to send tones”, followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
.If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
“OK, Sending <name tag>”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
.If the system does not
recognize the name tag, it
responds “Dial <name tag>,
please say yes or no?”,
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Sending <name
tag>”and the dial tones are
sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on Deleting a
Paired Phone and Deleting
Name Tags.
6-58 Infotainment System
Bluetooth (Navigation)
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using
the infotainment controls, see
“Overview”under Introduction, in
the Navigation supplement.
Bluetooth Pairing
To make calls with a Bluetooth cell
phone through your vehicle, it must
be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth
system first and then connected
to the vehicle before it can be
used. Refer to the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
Bluetooth pairing instructions.
If a Bluetooth phone is off or not
connected, calls will automatically
be made using the OnStar
®
Hands‐Free Calling feature,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information
about OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Pairing Information:
.Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.The Bluetooth system
automatically links with the
paired cell phone in the order
the phones were paired.
.Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth system at a time.
.Pairing should only need to be
completed once.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Infotainment System 6-59
3. Select “Add New Phone”, the
pairing process will begin
searching for Bluetooth devices
on your cellular pone. See the
cell phone manufacturer's user
guide for information on this
process.
On the cell phone, locate the
device named “General Motors”.
Follow the instructions given on
the cell phone or follow the voice
prompts, to enter the four digit
PIN number that has been
provided.
4. The system voice prompt
requests that you say the name
you want used for the phone that
is being paired. Use a name that
best describes the phone. The
system voice prompt then
repeats the name you provided
for confirmation, say “Yes”.
5. The system responds with
“phone name has been
successfully paired”after the
pairing process is complete.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
displayed on the screen.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
6-60 Infotainment System
3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously paired phones
will be displayed. If there is a
currently paired phone, a check
mark will appear on the right side of
the Phone name.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Infotainment System 6-61
3. Select the “Device List
submenu.
4. Select the phone to be deleted
and then follow the on screen
prompts to delete the device
from the system.
5. Once a phone has been deleted,
the only way to connect back to
that phone is to pair the phone
again. See “Bluetooth Pairing”
earlier before the process is
started.
6-62 Infotainment System
Pairing a Phone in the Device List
In order to pair to another phone,
the new phone in the Device List,
make sure the phone you would like
to pair is in the vehicle and available
to be connected to the Bluetooth
system before the process is
started.
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be paired
and then follow the on screen
prompts.
Infotainment System 6-63
5. The Phone menu will be
displayed with the name of
the phone paired.
Accepting or Declining an
Incoming Call
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes any
audio being played and sounds a
ring tone.
Accepting a Call
Press bgon the steering wheel
control to answer the incoming call,
or touch the Answer option to
answer the call.
Declining a Call
Press the c/$on the steering
wheel controls or select the Decline
option to decline the call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Switching Calls (Only Available
with Call Waiting)
This features allows you to switch
between calls making one call
active and placing the other on hold.
6-64 Infotainment System
Conference Calling
Conference and three way calling
must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless
service carrier to work.
To start a conference while in a
current call:
1. Press the 5hard key on the
faceplate until the Phone main
screen is shown with the current
active call.
2. Select the “Enter Number”
option.
3. Make another call. The first call
will be placed on hold while the
second call is dialing and
connected.
4. To make a conference call,
select the “Merge”option which
will merge both calls into one
conference call.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat
Steps 2 and 4. The amount of
callers that can be added are
limited by your wireless service
carrier.
Ending a Call
There are a few ways that a call can
be ended:
1. Press the 5hard key.
2. Select Hang Up.
Infotainment System 6-65
Mute or UnMute a Call
1. Press the 5hard key.
2. Select the Mute call option to
mute the call.
3. Select the Mute call option again
to unmute the call.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call for
“Dial 1 or 2”, for phone number
extensions, or voice mailboxes.
1. Press the 5hard key.
2. Select “Enter Number”option
and enter the number sequence.
6-66 Infotainment System
2NOTES
Climate Controls 7-1
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Maintenance
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter......................... 7-8
Climate Control Systems
Automatic Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
A. Power
B. Temperature Control
C. Fan Control
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
E. Recirculation
F. AUTO
G. Defrost
H. Air Conditioning
I. Rear Window Defogger
7-2 Climate Controls
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the system is in full automatic
operation. If the air delivery mode,
fan speed, recirculation or air
conditioning setting is adjusted, the
AUTO indicator turns off and the
selected settings will appear on the
display.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Adjust
the temperature as needed for
best comfort.
Q/R(Temperature Control):
Press to increase or decrease the
temperature.
Manual Operation
O(Power): Press to turn the fan
on or off.
D C (Fan Control): Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed setting appears on
the main display. Pressing either
button cancels automatic fan control
and the fan can be controlled
manually. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
e * (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press to change the
direction of the airflow. The current
mode appears in the display screen.
Pressing either button cancels
automatic air delivery control and
the direction of the airflow can be
controlled manually. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Y(Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\(Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
C(Tri‐Level): Air is divided
between the windshield, instrument
panel, and floor outlets.
[(Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
-(Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
0(Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield. Selecting defrost will
disable automatic control.
For best results, clear all snow
and ice from windshield before
defrosting.
#(Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. If the fan is turned off or the
outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioning system
will not run.
Climate Controls 7-3
Pressing this button cancels
automatic air conditioning and turns
off the air conditioner. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation
and the air conditioner runs
automatically as needed. When
the indicator light is on, the air
conditioner runs automatically to
cool the air inside the vehicle or to
dry the air needed to defog the
windshield faster.
>(Recirculation): Press to
alternate between recirculating air
inside the vehicle or pulling in
outside air. When the indicator light
is on, air is being recirculated inside
the vehicle. This helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle or
prevent outside air and odors from
entering.
Pressing this button cancels
automatic recirculation. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation and
recirculation runs automatically as
needed.
Rear Window Defogger
=(Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns
off automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about 5 minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by turning the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation, see
Climate and Air Quality under
Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
. When auto rear defog
is selected, the rear window
defogger turns on automatically
when the interior temperature is
cold and the outside temperature is
about 40°F and below. The auto
rear defogger turns off automatically
after about 10 minutes, or after
5 minutes if the outside temperature
is not as cold.
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, they turn on when
the rear window defogger button is
on and helps to clear fog or frost
from the surface of the mirror. See
Heated Mirrors on page 1‑16.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
covered by your warranty.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote vehicle start feature, the
climate control system may run
when the vehicle is started remotely.
The system uses the driver's
previous settings to heat or cool the
inside of the vehicle. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 1‑8.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
7-4 Climate Controls
Sensors
The solar sensor located on top of
the instrument panel near the
windshield monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system uses
the sensor information to adjust
the temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery
mode for best comfort.
Do not cover the sensors or the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
A. Power
B. Driver Temperature Control
C. Defrost
D. Fan Control
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
F. Recirculation / Automatic
Recirculation
G. Passenger Temperature Control
H. AUTO
I. Rear Window Defogger
J. Heated Steering Wheel
K. Air Conditioning
L. ZONE
Climate Controls 7-5
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the system is in full automatic
operation. If the air delivery mode,
fan speed, recirculation or air
conditioning setting is adjusted, the
AUTO indicator turns off and the
selected settings will appear on the
display.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Adjust
the temperature as needed for
best comfort.
Q/R(Driver and Passenger
Temperature Control): The
temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the temperature.
ZONE: Press to link all climate
zone settings to the driver's
settings. The ZONE indicator light
will turn off. When the passenger
settings are adjusted, the ZONE
indicator light is on.
Manual Operation
O(Power): Press to turn the fan
off or on.
D C (Fan Control): Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed setting appears on
the main display. Pressing either
button cancels automatic fan control
and the fan is controlled manually.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
e * (Air Delivery Mode
Control): Press to change the
direction of the airflow. The current
mode appears in the display screen.
Pressing either button cancels
automatic air delivery control and
the direction of the airflow is
controlled manually. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Y(Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\(Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
C(Tri‐Level): Air is divided
between the windshield, instrument
panel, and floor outlets.
[(Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
-(Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
7-6 Climate Controls
0(Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield.
For best results, clear all snow
and ice from windshield before
defrosting.
#(Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. If the fan is turned off or the
outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioner will
not run.
Pressing this button cancels
automatic air conditioning and turns
off the air conditioner. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation
and the air conditioner runs
automatically as needed. When
the indicator light is on, the air
conditioner runs automatically to
cool the air inside the vehicle or to
dry the air needed to defog the
windshield faster.
>//(Recirculation/Auto
Recirculation): Press to change to
automatic control of air recirculation
inside the vehicle. When the auto
recirculation indicator light is on, the
air is automatically recirculated as
needed to help quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle.
In auto recirculation control, the Air
Quality Control system may operate
when pollution is detected. To adjust
the sensitivity of the Air Quality
Control, see Climate and Air Quality
under Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
.
When the >indicator light is on, air
is recirculated inside the vehicle.
If both indicator lights are off,
outside air will flow into the vehicle.
Press AUTO or /to return to
automatic operation.
Auto Defog: The climate control
system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. The fan speed may
slightly increase to help prevent
fogging. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
on, see Climate and Air Quality
under Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
.
Climate Controls 7-7
Rear Window Defogger
=(Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns
off automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about 5 minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by turning the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation, see
Climate and Air Quality under
Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
. When auto rear defog is
selected, the rear window defogger
turns on automatically when the
interior temperature is cold and the
outside temperature is about 40°F
and below. The auto rear defogger
turns off automatically after about
10 minutes, or after 5 minutes if the
outside temperature is not as cold.
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, they turn on when
the rear window defogger button is
on and helps to clear fog or frost
from the surface of the mirror. See
Heated Mirrors on page 1‑16.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
covered by your warranty.
((Heated Steering Wheel): For
vehicles with this feature, press to
turn on or off. See Heated Steering
Wheel on page 4‑7.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote vehicle start feature, the
climate control system may run
when the vehicle is started remotely.
The system uses the driver's
previous settings to heat or cool the
inside of the vehicle. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 1‑8.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Sensors
The solar sensor, located on top
of the instrument panel near the
windshield monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system uses
the sensor information to adjust
the temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
Do not cover the sensors or the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
7-8 Climate Controls
Air Vents
Use the louvers located on the air
vents to change the direction of the
airflow.
To open the vent, move the
thumbwheel to R. To close the vent,
move the thumbwheel to (.
Operation Tips
.Keep all outlets open whenever
possible for best system
performance.
.Keep the path under all seats
clear of objects to help circulate
the air inside the vehicle more
effectively.
.Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Maintenance
Air Intake
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves
from the air intake at the base of the
windshield that can block the flow of
air into the vehicle.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Scheduled Maintenance
on
page 10‑2
for replacement
intervals. To find out what type of
filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑9.
The passenger compartment air
filter can be accessed by removing
the entire glove box.
1. Open the passenger side door.
Remove the end cover located
on the side of the instrument
panel in the top right corner.
Remove the screw affixed to the
side of the glove box.
2. Open the glove box door and
remove the attached screws
from around the glove box.
3. Lower the loosened glove box
housing.
4. Unplug both wire cables and
remove the glove box.
5. Pull the three tabs to release
and open the filter door.
Climate Controls 7-9
6. Remove the old air filter. 7. Install the new air filter.
8. Reinstall the air filter door.
Re‐install the glove box.
See your dealer/retailer if additional
assistance is needed.
7-10 Climate Controls
2NOTES
Driving and Operating 8-1
Driving and
Operating
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 8-9
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-12
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 8-17
Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Ignition Positions
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Running the Vehicle While
Parked ..................... 8-26
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-27
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . 8-36
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 8-36
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-40
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-49
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-50
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Trailer Towing
(2.4L L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Trailer Towing
(3.0L and 3.6L
V6 Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
.Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
.Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
.When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control, if equipped.
.Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.Combine several trips into a
single trip.
.Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
.Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Driving and Operating 8-3
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.”The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts
on
page 2‑10
.
{WARNING
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
.Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
.Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious —or even
fatal —collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
8-4 Driving and Operating
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system can
make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking —driver or passenger —is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving —brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 8‑34.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑19
.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two
or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three‐fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That
could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough
space between the vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts —heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking —rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Driving and Operating 8-5
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
The vehicle has a steering system
that varies the amount of effort
required to steer the vehicle in
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
The amount of steering effort
required is less at slower
speeds to make the vehicle more
maneuverable and easier to park.
At faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like feel
to the steering. This provides
maximum control and stability.
If the vehicle seems harder to steer
than normal when parking or driving
slowly, there may be a problem with
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer
than normal at slow speeds. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
8-6 Driving and Operating
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking —if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for
evasive action —steering around
the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply
the brakes. See Braking
on
page 8‑4
. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then,
if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the
edge of the pavement.
Driving and Operating 8-7
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm
(3 to 5 inches), about one-eighth
turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the
steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems —brakes,
steering, and acceleration —do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues —such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface —and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
8-8 Driving and Operating
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
{WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
.Allow extra following distance.
.Pass with caution.
.Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
.Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
.Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires
on
page 9‑48
.
.Turn off cruise control.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Driving and Operating 8-9
Other driving tips include:
.Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.Keep interior temperature cool.
.Keep your eyes moving —scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
.Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
.Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.Going down steep or long hills,
shift to a lower gear.
{WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
{WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
.Top of hills: Be alert —
something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
.Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or
grip. Wet ice can occur at about
0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less
traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or
in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
8-10 Driving and Operating
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 8‑31
improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program
on page 12‑6
.
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
.Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
{WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.Open a window about 5 cm
(two inches) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from
the wind to bring in fresh air.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 8-11
WARNING (Continued)
.Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑26.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
8-12 Driving and Operating
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
{WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9‑70.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑81.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
Driving and Operating 8-13
{WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires
on page 9‑48
and Tire
Pressure
on page 9‑56
.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label”later in this section.
8-14 Driving and Operating
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs”on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 −750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing (2.4L L4
Engine)
on page 8‑58
or Trailer
Towing (3.0L and 3.6L
V6 Engines)
on page 8‑58
for
important information on towing
a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
Driving and Operating 8-15
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(750 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to the driver
side center pillar. The label tells
the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
8-16 Driving and Operating
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
And, if there is a heavy load, it
should be spread out. See
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit”earlier in this
section.
{WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
If you put things inside the
vehicle —like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything
else —they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
{WARNING
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
.Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
.Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 8-17
WARNING (Continued)
.Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
.When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
.Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
Starting and
Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
.During the first 1 000 km
(600 miles), avoid using more
than moderate acceleration
in lower gears and avoid
vehicle speeds above
110 km/h (68 mph).
.Between the first 1 000 km
(600 miles) and 5 000 km
(3,000 miles), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
can be used. Vehicle speeds
above 110 km/h (68 mph)
should be limited to
five minutes per use.
.Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
.Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving
Characteristics and Towing
Tips
on page 8‑54
for the
trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more
information.
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
8-18 Driving and Operating
Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access)
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with push‐button
start.
Pressing the button cycles it through
three positions, ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START and OFF.
The transmitter must be in the
vehicle for the system to operate.
If the push-button start is not
working, the vehicle may be near a
strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless access
system. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Key
Access)
on page 1‑4
or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access)
on
page 1‑5
for more information.
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must
be applied.
OFF: When this button is pressed
with the engine running, the engine
will be turned off.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
ignition will turn off, and Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
on page 8‑20
for
more information.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the
ignition will return to ACC/
ACCESSORY and display the
message SHIFT TO PARK in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑25
for more information.
When the vehicle is shifted into
P (Park), the ignition system will
switch to OFF.
ACC/ACCESSORY: This position
allows you to use some electrical
accessories when the engine is off.
With the ignition off, pressing the
button one time without the brake
pedal applied, will place the ignition
system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The ignition will switch from
ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after
five minutes to prevent battery
run down.
Driving and Operating 8-19
ON/RUN/START: This position is
for driving and starting. With the
ignition off, and the brake pedal
applied, pressing the button once
will place the ignition system in ON/
RUN/START. Once engine cranking
begins, release the button. Engine
cranking will continue until the
engine starts. See Starting the
Engine
on page 8‑20
for more
information. The ignition will then
remain in ON/RUN.
To place the ignition in ON/RUN/
START from OFF without starting
the engine, press the button two
times without your foot on the brake
pedal.
The battery could be drained if you
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN/
START position with the engine off.
You may not be able to start the
vehicle if the battery is allowed to
drain for an extended period of time.
Ignition Positions (Key
Access)
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer/retailer.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
brake pedal.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only
position from which the key can be
removed. This locks the ignition and
automatic transmission.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
to turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This
position provides power to some of
the electrical accessories. It unlocks
the ignition. The transmission is
also unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
To move the key from ACC/
ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, the
shift lever must be in P (Park).
8-20 Driving and Operating
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running. This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, including the
ventilation fan and 12 volt power
outlet, as well as to display some
warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not restart if
the battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
D (START) : This position starts
the engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal
driving.
A warning tone sounds when the
driver door is opened when the
ignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORY
and the key is in the ignition.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
.Audio System
.Power Windows
.Sunroof (if equipped)
.Auxiliary Power Outlet
Power to the audio system will
continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened.
Power to the power windows and
sunroof will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes or until any door is
opened.
All these features will work when
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Notice: The engine is designed
to work with the electronics in
the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer/retailer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform
properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Driving and Operating 8-21
Starting Procedure (Key Access)
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. When the engine starts,
let go of the ignition.
The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for
a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition switch to
ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
5‐10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below −18°C or
0°F), it could be flooded with too
much gasoline. Try pushing the
accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in START,
or press the START button, for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key or button, and the
accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
8-22 Driving and Operating
Starting Procedure
(Keyless Access)
1. If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, the transmitter
must be in the vehicle. Put your
foot on the brake pedal and
push the START button. When
the engine begins cranking, let
go of the button.
The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
If the transmitter is not in the
vehicle or something is
interfering with the transmitter,
the Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display NO REMOTE
DETECTED. See Driver
Information Center (DIC)
on
page 4‑25
for more information.
If the battery in the keyless
access transmitter needs
replacing, the DIC displays
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY. The vehicle can
still be driven. See Starting the
Vehicle with a Low Transmitter
Battery in Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Key
Access)
on page 1‑4
or
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Keyless
Access)
on page 1‑5
for more
information.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the START
button is pressed, and then
released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few
seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not
start and the button is pressed
for many seconds, cranking will
be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by pressing the START button a
second time.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
5‐10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below −18°C or
0°F), it could be flooded with too
much gasoline. Try pushing the
accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in START,
or press the START button, for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Driving and Operating 8-23
Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key or button, and the
accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater,
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
To Use The Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on
the driver side of the engine
compartment, between the
fender and the engine
compartment fuse block.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
{WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be
parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
8-24 Driving and Operating
Shifting Into Park
{WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake
on
page 8‑32
for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition off.
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold
down the regular brake pedal.
See if you can move the shift lever
away from P (Park) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
Driving and Operating 8-25
Shifting Out of Park
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock
The vehicle has an electronic shift
lock release system. The shift lock
release is designed to:
.Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park).
.Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the
brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock is always functional
except in the case of a an
uncharged or low voltage (less
than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting
on
page 9‑77
.
If the console shift lever cannot be
moved out of P (Park):
1. Apply and maintain the regular
brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN
position. See Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access)
on page 8‑18
or Ignition Positions (Key
Access)
on page 8‑19
for more
information.
3. Let up on the shift lever and
make sure the shift lever is
pushed all the way into P (Park).
4. Press the shift lever button
5. Then, move the shift lever into
the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
{WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
8-26 Driving and Operating
Engine Exhaust
{WARNING
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
.There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
{WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑26.
Driving and Operating 8-27
{WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 8‑24.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑54.
Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission has a
shift lever located on the console
between the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
{WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park
on
page 8‑24
. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑54.
Make sure the shift lever is
fully in P (Park) before starting
the engine. The vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift
lock control system.
8-28 Driving and Operating
The regular brake must be fully
applied first and then the shift lever
button pressed before shifting from
P (Park) when the ignition key is in
ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever, then push the shift lever all
the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park
on
page 8‑25
.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑12.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
{WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If more power is
needed for passing, and the
vehicle is:
.Going less than 35 mph
(56 km/h), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
.Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
Driving and Operating 8-29
Notice: If the vehicle seems to
accelerate slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can
drive in L (Low) when you are
driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
and D (Drive) for higher speeds
until then.
Manual Mode: This position is
shown on the shifter as a +/−.
It allows the driver to select the
gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. See Manual Mode
on
page 8‑29
for more information.
Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
high RPMs without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission. To use the DSC
feature:
With Selective Ride Control
1. Move the shift lever to the left
from D (Drive).
The vehicle will be in Sport
Mode. The gear indicator in the
DIC will still display a D for
Drive, and the Sport Mode On
message will be displayed
momentarily. See Driver
Information Center (DIC)
on
page 4‑25
. When you are in
Sport Mode, the vehicle will still
shift automatically, but chassis
tuning is modified. See Selective
Ride Control
on page 8‑36
.
If you move the shift lever
forward or rearward, the
transmission will enter Manual
Mode, and the DIC gear
indicator will change to an M
followed by a number
representing the gear the vehicle
is currently in.
2. In Manual Mode, press the shift
lever forward to upshift or
rearward to downshift.
Without Selective Ride Control
1. Move the shift lever to the left
from D (Drive).
The transmission will enter
Manual Mode. The DIC gear
indicator will change to an M
followed by a number
representing the gear the
vehicle is currently in.
2. In Manual Mode, press the shift
lever forward to upshift or
rearward to downshift.
8-30 Driving and Operating
Uplevel Display Shown, Base
Model Similar
The display on the instrument panel
cluster will show which gear the
vehicle is in. The number indicates
the requested gear range when
moving the shift lever forward or
rearward.
The transmission will only allow
you to shift into gears appropriate
for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The
transmission will not automatically
shift to the next lower gear if the
engine RPM is too high, nor to the
next higher gear when the maximum
engine RPM is reached.
While in the DSC mode, the
transmission will automatically
downshift when the vehicle comes
to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off.
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear allows you to
gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive
With this feature, engine power is
always sent to all four wheels. It is
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.
When using a compact spare tire
on an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on system, replace
the compact spare with a full-size
tire as soon as possible. See
Compact Spare Tire
on page 9‑76
for more information.
Driving and Operating 8-31
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 4‑21
.
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. The ABS pump or motor
might be heard operating, and the
brake pedal might be felt to pulsate,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
8-32 Driving and Operating
Parking Brake
The vehicle has an Electric Parking
Brake (EPB). The switch for the
EPB is in the center console. The
EPB can always be activated, even
if the ignition is OFF. To prevent
draining the battery, avoid repeated
cycles of the EPB system when the
engine is not running.
The system has a Park Brake
Status light and a Park Brake
Warning light. See Electric Parking
Brake Light
on page 4‑20
.
There are also three Driver
Information Center (DIC) messages.
See Brake System Messages
on
page 4‑33
for more information. In
case of insufficient electrical power,
the EPB cannot be applied or
released.
Before leaving the vehicle, check
the park brake status lamp to insure
the park brake is applied.
EPB Apply
The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the park brake status light will be
on. While the brake is being applied,
the status lamp will flash until full
apply is reached. If the light does
not come on, or remains flashing,
you need to have the vehicle
serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if
the park brake status light is
flashing. See your dealer/retailer.
See Electric Parking Brake Light
on
page 4‑20
for more information.
If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
sound, and the DIC message
RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH
will be displayed. The vehicle will
decelerate as long as the switch is
held in the up position. Releasing
the EPB switch during the
deceleration will release the parking
brake. If the switch is held in the up
position until the vehicle comes to a
stop, the EPB will remain applied.
If the park brake status light flashes
continuously, the EPB is only
partially applied or released,
or there is a problem with the EPB.
The DIC message SERVICE PARK
BRAKE will be displayed. If this light
flashes continuously, release the
EPB, and attempt to apply it again.
If this light continues to flash, do not
drive the vehicle. See your dealer/
retailer.
Driving and Operating 8-33
If the park brake warning light is on,
the EPB has detected an error in
another system and is operating
with reduced functionality. To apply
the EPB when this light is on, lift up
on the EPB switch and hold it in the
up position. Full application of the
parking brake by the EPB system
may take a longer period of time
than normal when this light is on.
Continue to hold the switch until the
park brake status light remains on.
If the park brake warning light is on,
see your dealer/retailer.
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
wheels should be blocked to
prevent vehicle movement.
EPB Release
To release the EPB, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position,
apply and hold the brake pedal, and
push down momentarily on the EPB
switch. If you attempt to release the
EPB without the brake pedal
applied, a chime will sound, and the
DIC message PRESS BRAKE
PEDAL TO RELEASE PARK
BRAKE will be displayed. The EPB
is released when the park brake
status light is off.
If the park brake warning light is on,
the EPB has detected an error in
another system and is operating
with reduced functionality. To
release the EPB when this light is
on, push down on the EPB switch
and hold it in the down position.
EPB release may take a longer
period of time than normal when this
light is on. Continue to hold the
switch until the park brake status
light is off. If the light is on, see your
dealer/retailer.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
Automatic EPB Release
The EPB will automatically release if
the vehicle is running, placed into
gear and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when the EPB is applied, to
preserve park brake lining life.
For maximum EPB force when
towing a trailer or parking on a hill,
pull the EPB switch twice. If you are
towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
see Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips
on page 8‑54
for more
information.
8-34 Driving and Operating
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a traction control
system that limits wheel spin. This is
especially useful in slippery road
conditions. On a front-wheel-drive
vehicle, the system operates if it
senses that one or both of the front
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
flashes to indicate that the traction
control system is active.
This warning light comes on if there
is a problem with the traction control
system.
See Traction Off Light
on
page 4‑21
. When this warning
light is on, the system does not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
TCS automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started.
To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on. But, TCS
can be turned off if needed.
Driving and Operating 8-35
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
or accelerate heavily when TCS is
off. The vehicle's driveline could
be damaged.
The TCS off light comes on to
indicate that the traction control
system has been turned off.
When TCS is switched off on AWD
vehicles, the system may still make
noise. This is normal and necessary
with the AWD hardware on the
vehicle.
It might be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If the
Vehicle is Stuck
on page 8‑12
for
more information. See also Winter
Driving
on page 8‑9
for
information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
To turn the system off, press g
located on the console to the right
of the shifter.
Press and release gand the traction
control system turns off and the
traction control system warning light
comes on. Press gagain to turn the
system back on. For information on
turning StabiliTrak off and on, see
StabiliTrak System following in this
section.
Adding non‐GM accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 9‑3
for more information.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
The vehicle has a vehicle stability
enhancement system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a difference
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the intended direction.
When the stability control system
activates, the Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light
flashes on the instrument panel.
8-36 Driving and Operating
This also occurs when traction
control is activated. A noise might
be heard or vibration might be felt in
the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, the TCS/StabiliTrak light
comes on and the system is not
operational. See Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light
on page 4‑22
. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. To
assist with directional control of the
vehicle, the system should always
be left on.
StabiliTrak can be turned off if
needed by pressing and holding g
until the StabiliTrak Off light comes
on the instrument panel. For
information on turning TCS off and
on, see Traction Control System
(TCS) in this section.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control automatically disengages.
Press the cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control
on
page 8‑37
for more information.
Limited-Slip Differential
Vehicles with a limited-slip
differential can give more traction on
snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel.
It works like a standard differential
most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive
wheel with the most traction to
move the vehicle.
Selective Ride Control
The vehicle may have a ride control
system called Selective Ride
Control. The system provides the
following performance benefits:
.Reduced Impact Harshness
.Improved Road Isolation
.Improved High-Speed Stability
.Improved Handling Response
.Better Control of Body Ride
Motions
To switch from TOUR to SPORT
mode, move the shift lever to the
left while the transmission is in
D (Drive).
Driving and Operating 8-37
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
SPORT: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to road
conditions through increased
steering effort and suspension
tuning.
The setting can be changed at any
time. Based on road conditions,
steering wheel angle and the
vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide the
best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a
smooth road.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
On vehicles with the Traction
Control System (TCS) or Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), the system
may begin to limit wheel spin while
you are using cruise control. If this
happens, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. See
Traction Control System (TCS)
on
page 8‑34
or Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 8‑35.
{WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
8-38 Driving and Operating
Setting Cruise Control
{WARNING
If you leave your cruise control on
when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to
use cruise control.
The cruise control buttons are
located on the steering wheel.
5(On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
An indicator light will turn on or off in
the instrument panel cluster.
\(Cancel): Press to cancel cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the
thumbwheel up to resume a set
speed or to accelerate to a higher
speed.
SET/−(Set/Coast): Move the
thumbwheel down to set a speed or
to decrease the speed.
To set a speed:
1. Press 5to turn the cruise
control system on. The indicator
light in the instrument panel
cluster comes on.
2. Get to the speed desired.
3. Move the thumbwheel down
toward SET/−and release it.
The desired set speed briefly
appears in the instrument panel
cluster.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control shuts off.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the brakes are applied or the
Cancel button is pressed while the
cruise control is at a set speed, the
cruise control disengages without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle reaches about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the
thumbwheel up toward RES/+
briefly . The vehicle returns to the
speed selected previously and stays
there.
Driving and Operating 8-39
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already engaged,
.Move the thumbwheel up toward
RES/+ and hold it until the
vehicle accelerates to the
desired speed, and then
release it.
.To increase the speed in small
amounts, move the thumbwheel
up toward RES/+ briefly and
then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already engaged,
.Move the thumbwheel toward
SET/−and hold until the desired
lower speed is reached, then
release it.
.To slow down in very small
amounts, move the thumbwheel
toward SET/−briefly and then
release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle's speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previously set cruise control speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle's
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle's speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to maintain the
vehicle's speed. When the brakes
are applied the cruise control
shuts off.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to disengage
the cruise control:
.Step lightly on the brake pedal
or clutch; when cruise control
disengages, the indicator light
will not be lit.
.Press \.
.Press 5to turn the cruise
control system off completely.
The cruise control cannot be
resumed.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed
memory is erased when the cruise
control or the ignition is turned off.
8-40 Driving and Operating
Object Detection
Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
it assists the driver with parking
and avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). URPA operates at
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
and the sensors on the rear bumper
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft.)
behind the vehicle, and at least
20 cm (8 in.) off the ground.
{WARNING
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
.Objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
.Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care
before and while backing; vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
to indicate the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in.) the beeps are
continuous.
To be detected, objects must be at
least 20 cm (8 in.) off the ground
and below trunk level. Objects must
also be within 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the
rear bumper. The distance objects
can be detected may be less during
warmer or humid weather.
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off. The
message disappears after a short
period of time.
Driving and Operating 8-41
Turning the System On and Off
The URPA system can be turned on
and off using the park assist button
located next to the shift lever.
The park assist button lights up
when the system is on and turns off
when it has been disabled.
URPA defaults to the on setting
each time the vehicle is started.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this
message occurs, take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer to repair the
system.
PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPA
system does not activate due to a
temporary condition, the message
displays on the DIC, see Driver
Information Center (DIC)
on
page 4‑25
for more information.
This can occur under the following
conditions:
.The driver has disabled the
system.
.The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 9‑84
.
.An object was hanging out of the
trunk during the last drive cycle.
Once the object is removed,
URPA will return to normal
operation.
.The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer to repair the
system.
.Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after
driving forward at least 40 km/h
(25 mph), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
8-42 Driving and Operating
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA)
The vehicle may have a Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system. Read
this entire section before using the
system.
{WARNING
SBZA is only a lane changing aid
and does not replace driver
vision. SBZA does not detect:
.Vehicles outside the side
blind zones which may be
rapidly approaching.
.Pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Failure to use proper care when
changing lanes may result in
damage to the vehicle, injury,
or death. Always check the
outside and rearview mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and
use the turn signal before
changing lanes.
When the system detects a vehicle
in the side blind zone, amber SBZA
displays will light up in the side
mirrors. This indicates that it may be
unsafe to change lanes. Before
making a lane change, always
check the SBZA display, check the
outside and rearview mirrors, look
over your shoulder for vehicles and
hazards, and use the turn signal.
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
approximately one lane over from
both sides of the vehicle,
3.5 m (11 ft.). This zone starts at
each side mirror and goes back
approximately 5.0 m (16 ft.). The
height of the zone is approximately
between 0.5 m (1.5 ft.) and
2.0 m (6 ft.) off the ground.
The SBZA detection zones do not
change if the vehicle is towing a
trailer. So be extra careful when
changing lanes while towing a
trailer.
Driving and Operating 8-43
How the System Works
Left Side Mirror
Display
Right Side Mirror
Display
When the vehicle is started, both
outside mirror displays will briefly
come on to indicate that the system
is operating. While driving forward,
the left or right side mirror SBZA
display will light up if a vehicle is
detected in that blind zone. If you
activate a turn signal and a vehicle
has been detected on the same
side, the SBZA display will flash to
give you extra warning not to
change lanes.
SBZA displays do not come on
while the vehicle is approaching or
passing other vehicles. At speeds
greater than 32 km/h (20 mph),
SBZA displays may come on when
a vehicle you have passed remains
in or drops back into the
detection zone.
SBZA can be disabled through
Vehicle Personalization. See
Vehicle Personalization
on
page 4‑38
for more information.
If the SBZA is disabled by the
driver, the SBZA mirror displays will
not light up during normal driving.
When the System Does Not Seem
To Work Properly
Occasional missed alerts can occur
under normal circumstances and will
increase in wet conditions. The
system does not need to be
serviced due to an occasional
missed alert. The number of missed
alerts will increase with increased
rainfall or road spray.
If the SBZA displays do not light up
when the system is on and vehicles
are in the blind zone, the system
may need service. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer.
SBZA is designed to ignore
stationary objects; however, the
system may occasionally light up
due to guard rails, signs, trees,
shrubs, and other stationary objects.
This is normal system operation, the
vehicle does not need service.
8-44 Driving and Operating
SBZA does not operate when the
left or right corners of the rear
bumper are covered with mud, dirt,
snow, ice, slush, or in heavy
rainstorms. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on
page 9‑84
. If the infotainment
display still shows the SIDE BLIND
ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE
message after cleaning the bumper,
see your dealer/retailer.
The SBZA displays may remain on
if a trailer is attached to the vehicle,
or a bicycle or object is extending
out to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any
reason other than the driver turning
it off, the driver will not be able to
turn SBZA back on using Vehicle
Personalization. The SIDE BLIND
ZONE ALERT ON option will not be
selectable if the conditions for
normal system operation are not
met. Until normal operating
conditions for SBZA are met, you
should not rely upon SBZA while
driving.
SBZA Error Messages
The following messages may
appear on the infotainment display:
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF: This message
indicates that the driver has turned
the system off.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.
UNAVAILABLE: This message
indicates that the SBZA system is
disabled because the sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles
in the blind zone. The sensor may
be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or even heavy rainstorms.
This message may also activate
during heavy rain or due to road
spray. The vehicle does not need
service. For cleaning, see Exterior
Care on page 9‑84.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE
ALERT SYSTEM: If this message
appears, both SBZA displays will
remain on indicating there is a
problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after
continued driving, the system needs
service. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
Driving and Operating 8-45
FCC Information
See Radio Frequency Statement
on
page 12‑17
for FCC information.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
This vehicle may have an RVC
system. Read this entire section
before using it.
The RVC system can assist the
driver when backing up by
displaying a view of the area behind
the vehicle.
{WARNING
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
.Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
.Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
So if you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could hit a
vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the
vehicle.
An image appears on the navigation
screen with the message Check
Surroundings for Safety when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The navigation screen goes to the
previous screen after approximately
10 seconds once the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse).
To cancel the delay, do one of the
following:
.Pressing a hard key on the
navigation system.
.Shifting in to P (Park).
.Reach a vehicle speed of
8 km/h (5 mph).
8-46 Driving and Operating
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off
To turn the RVC system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button to
enter the configure menu
options.
3. Select Display.
4. Select Rear Camera Options.
5. Select Camera. When a check
mark appears next to the
Camera option, then the RVC
system is on.
Symbols
The navigation system may have a
feature that lets the driver view
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system
must not be disabled to use the
caution symbols. The error message
Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Unavailable may display if URPA
has been disabled and the symbols
have been turned on. See
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on
page 8‑40
.
The symbols appear and may cover
an object when viewing the
navigation screen when an object is
detected by the URPA system.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button to
enter the configure menu
options.
3. Select Display
4. Select Rear Camera Options.
5. Select Symbols. When a check
mark appears next to the
Symbols option, symbols will
appear.
Guidelines
The RVC system has a guideline
overlay that can help the driver align
the vehicle when backing into a
parking spot.
To turn the guidelines on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button to
enter the configure menu
options.
Driving and Operating 8-47
3. Select Display
4. Select Rear Camera Options.
5. Select Guidelines. When a
check mark appears next to the
Guidelines option, guidelines will
appear.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera
System: This message can display
when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other
vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a
problem persists, see your dealer/
retailer.
Rear Vision Camera Location
The camera is located above the
license plate.
The area displayed by the camera is
limited, it does not display objects
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper and can vary
depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen is
different from the actual distance.
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
8-48 Driving and Operating
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
The RVC system may not work
properly or display a clear image if:
.The RVC is turned off. See
“Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off”earlier in this
section.
.It is dark.
.The sun or the beam of
headlamps are shining directly
into the camera lens.
.Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
.The back of the vehicle is in an
accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer/retailer.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Driving and Operating 8-49
The 8th digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN)
on
page 11‑1
.
Recommended Fuel
If the vehicle has a 2.4L L4 engine
(VIN Code C) or the 3.0L V6 engine
(VIN Code G), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, an audible knocking
noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock, might be heard when
driving. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
(VIN Code V), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. You
can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, but the vehicle's acceleration
could be slightly reduced, and a
slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard. If the octane
is less than 87, a heavy knocking
noise might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 8‑50
for additional
information.
8-50 Driving and Operating
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on
page 4‑17
. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean,
or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Driving and Operating 8-51
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change, can
help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer/retailer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not
reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask
the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains
MMT. We recommend against the
use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life
of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer
for service.
8-52 Driving and Operating
Filling the Tank
{WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is behind
the fuel door on the vehicle's
passenger side. Turn the fuel cap
counterclockwise to remove. While
refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap
from the disk on the end of the fuel
cap to the mating feature on the fuel
door hinge. Reinstall the cap by
turning it clockwise until it clicks
{WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Do not top off or overfill the tank and
wait a few seconds before removing
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 9‑84.
{WARNING
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer/
retailer. The wrong type fuel cap
might not fit properly, might
cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light, and could damage
the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4‑17.
Driving and Operating 8-53
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
{WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
.Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
.Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
.Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer/retailer or
trailering retailer for assistance with
preparing the vehicle for towing a
trailer.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips”.
.For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing”.
.For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment”.
8-54 Driving and Operating
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle
on
page 9‑81
. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle —such as a motorhome,
see Recreational Vehicle Towing
on
page 9‑81
.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
{WARNING
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well —or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle
may also be damaged; the
resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Pull a trailer only if all the steps in
this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice
and information about towing a
trailer with the vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer when
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. For trailer
ing capacity, see Trailer Towing
(2.4L L4 Engine)
on page 8‑58
or
Trailer Towing (3.0L and 3.6L
V6 Engines)
on page 8‑58
.
Trailering changes handling,
acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. With the added
weight, the engine, transmission,
wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder and under
greater loads. The trailer also adds
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements. For safe
trailering, correctly use the proper
trailering equipment.
The following information has
important trailering tips and rules for
your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.There are many laws, including
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
.Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
.During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
.The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.
Driving and Operating 8-55
.Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode
when towing.
.Obey speed limit restrictions.
Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Towing with a Stability Control
System
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle
before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.
8-56 Driving and Operating
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal so the
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers.
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
The turn signal indicators on the
instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps also flash, telling other
drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant
boils at a lower temperature than at
normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, the vehicle could show
signs similar to engine overheating.
To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off. If the
overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 9‑21.
Driving and Operating 8-57
Parking on Hills
{WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
.Start the engine.
.Shift into a gear.
.Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before
and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 9‑21
.
8-58 Driving and Operating
Trailer Towing
(2.4L L4 Engine)
Vehicles with a four cylinder engine
are neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
Trailer Towing (3.0L and
3.6L V6 Engines)
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
.The weight of the trailer.
.The weight of the trailer tongue.
.The total weight on your
vehicle's tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
For a vehicle with a V6 engine, it
should never weigh more than
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
(US, Can)
on page 12‑3
for more
information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12
for more information.
Driving and Operating 8-59
The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10‐15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your
Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Tire-Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on
page 8‑12
. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Towing Equipment
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer/retailer or a hitch
dealer for assistance.
.The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
.Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
hitch is removed. If the holes are
not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on
page 8‑26
.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
8-60 Driving and Operating
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer/
retailer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle and the damage would
not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other
components from working as
they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
on page 2‑36
and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑37.
Vehicle Care 9-1
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Hood .......................... 9-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 9-13
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 9-23
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Brakes ....................... 9-25
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-28
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Check ...................... 9-29
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check ...................... 9-29
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-30
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal
and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
9-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . 9-49
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer/retailer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Vehicle Care 9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories to the vehicle can affect
vehicle performance and safety,
including such things as airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
9-4 Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the
vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
on
page 2‑37
.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
{WARNING
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on
page 12‑13
.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Check on page 2‑38.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records
on
page 10‑10
.
Vehicle Care 9-5
Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood release
handle located to the left of the
steering column below the
instrument panel.
2. Push the secondary hood
release lever, located under the
center of the hood above the
grille, to the right to disengage it.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, make sure
all the filler caps are properly
secured. Pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
9-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4 L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 9-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on
page 9‑15
.
B. Engine Cover.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑11.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑11.
E. Transmission Fluid Cap and
Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid
on
page 9‑14
.
F. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes
on
page 9‑25
.
G. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 9‑23
.
H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑18.
I. Battery Cover. See Battery
on
page 9‑27
.
J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑41.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on
page 9‑24
.
9-8 Vehicle Care
3.0 L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 9-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on
page 9‑15
.
B. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 9‑23
.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑11.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil
on
page 9‑11
.
E. Engine Cover.
F. Transmission Fluid Cap and
Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid
on
page 9‑14
.
G. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes
on
page 9‑25
.
H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑18.
I. Battery Cover. See Battery
on
page 9‑27
.
J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑41.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on
page 9‑24
.
9-10 Vehicle Care
3.6 L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 9-11
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on
page 9‑15
.
B. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 9‑23
.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑11.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil
on
page 9‑11
.
E. Engine Cover.
F. Transmission Fluid Cap and
Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid
on
page 9‑14
.
G. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes
on
page 9‑25
.
H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑18.
I. Battery Cover. See Battery
on
page 9‑27
.
J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑41.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on
page 9‑24
.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must
be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on
page 9‑6
for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
9-12 Vehicle Care
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick,
add at least one liter/quart of the
recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2
.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil
that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows
the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM
Standard GM6094M.
.SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity,
or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
.American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst
symbol on the container. This
symbol indicates that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil
identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use
the recommended oil can result
in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 9-13
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30
engine oil. Both provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. Always use
an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with the
starburst symbol that meet GM
standards are all that is needed for
good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A “Change Engine
Oil Soon”message comes on.
See Engine Oil Messages
on
page 4‑35
. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 1 000 km
(600 miles). It is possible that,
if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper
level.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
9-14 Vehicle Care
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Press the DIC menu button on
the turn signal lever to scroll
through the menu items on the
DIC screen.
3. Press the set button to clear the
“Change Engine Oil Soon”
message and/or restore the
“Remaining Oil Life 100%”
message.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
The system is reset when the
“Change Engine Oil Soon”message
is off and the “Remaining Oil Life
100%”message is is displayed.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer service department
and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
Vehicle Care 9-15
There is a special procedure for
checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, you should
have this done at your dealer/
retailer service department. Contact
your dealer/retailer for additional
information or the procedure can
be found in the service manual.
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 12‑13.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance
on page 10‑2
, and
be sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is
located in the engine compartment
on the driver's side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6
for more information
on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance
on
page 10‑2
for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter do the following:
2.4 L L4 Engine
1. Remove the screws on top of
the engine air cleaner/filter
housing.
9-16 Vehicle Care
2. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5. Lower the filter cover housing
toward the engine.
6. Install the screws to the top of
the housing to lock the cover in
place.
3.0 L V6 Engine shown,
3.6 L V6 Engine similar
1. Remove the screws on top of
the engine air cleaner/filter
housing.
2. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5. Lower the filter cover housing
toward the engine.
6. Install the screws to the top of
the housing to lock the cover in
place.
{WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
Vehicle Care 9-17
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
When it is safe to lift the hood:
2.4 L L4 Engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Recovery Tank and
Pressure Cap
3.0 L V6 Engine shown,
3.6 L V6 Engine similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Recovery Tank and
Pressure Cap
{WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL
®
can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
9-18 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL
®
engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years
or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating
on
page 9‑21
.
What to Use
{WARNING
Adding only plain water to the
cooling system can be
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch
fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
.Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.Will not damage aluminum parts.
.Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Vehicle Care 9-19
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant recovery tank. If the
coolant inside the coolant recovery
tank is boiling, do not do anything
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the mark pointed to, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant at
the coolant recovery tank, but be
sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
If no coolant is visible in the surge
tank, add coolant as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
{WARNING
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
{WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
9-20 Vehicle Care
{WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you
turn the surge tank pressure
cap —even a little —they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
The coolant surge tank pressure
cap can be removed when the
cooling system, including the surge
tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot.
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise. If a hiss is
heard, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap and
remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture to the mark
pointed to on the front of the
coolant surge tank.
Vehicle Care 9-21
4. With the coolant surge tank cap
off, start the engine and let it run
until the upper radiator hose
starts getting hot. Watch out for
the engine cooling fan(s). By this
time, the coolant level inside
the coolant surge tank may be
lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the
level reaches the mark pointed
to on the front of the coolant
surge tank.
5. Replace the cap. Be sure the
cap is hand–tight and full
seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture at the
coolant recovery tank.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
There is a coolant temperature
gauge and a warning light on the
instrument panel cluster that
indicate an overheated engine
condition. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
on page 4‑14
for more information.
You may decide not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 12‑6
.
If you do decide to lift the hood,
make sure the vehicle is parked on
a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, the fan(s)
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
9-22 Vehicle Care
If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
on page 9‑23
for
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From
The Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem might not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.Climbing a long hill on a hot day.
.Stopping after high-speed
driving.
.Idling for long periods in traffic.
.Towing a trailer.
If the overheat warning displays with
no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
Vehicle Care 9-23
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency
situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is significant loss in
power and engine performance.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on the
instrument panel, to indicate the
vehicle has entered overheated
engine protection operating mode.
The temperature gauge also
indicates an overheat condition
exists. Driving extended km (miles)
and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6
for information on the
location of the power steering fluid
reservoir.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless a
leak is suspected in the system or
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid
loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Check the level after the vehicle
has been driven for at least
twenty minutes so the fluid is warm.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and pull it
straight up.
4. Wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
5. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
9-24 Vehicle Care
When the engine is hot, the level
should be at the hot MAX level.
When the engine is cold, the fluid
level should be between MIN and
MAX on the dipstick.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
on page 10‑7
. Always
use the proper fluid.
Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid
is needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an
area where the temperature can
fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on
page 9‑6
for reservoir location.
Notice:
.When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
.Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
.Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is
completely full.
.Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.
Vehicle Care 9-25
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
{WARNING
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake
wear warning sound is heard,
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake
pedal does not return to normal
height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a
sign that brake service might be
required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes —for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
9-26 Vehicle Care
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview
on
page 9‑6
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
.A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much
fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
{WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑19.
Vehicle Care 9-27
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake
fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
{WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in
the brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
.Using the wrong fluid
can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the
brake hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
.If brake fluid is spilled on
the vehicle's painted
surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on
the original battery label when a
new battery is needed.
{DANGER
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
If the battery has a very low charge
or is dead, it might not be possible
to remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch or shift out of
P (Park). See Shifting Out of Park
on page 8‑25
.
9-28 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage
{WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting
on
page 9‑77
for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Starter Switch Check
{WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake
on
page 8‑32
.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
Vehicle Care 9-29
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
System Check
{WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake
on
page 8‑32
.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try
to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
.The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
.With the key access ignition
system, the ignition key should
come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
9-30 Vehicle Care
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
{WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
.To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear and cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance
on
page 10‑2
for more information.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed
in different ways. For proper type
and length, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑9.
Vehicle Care 9-31
To replace the windshield wiper
blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
2. Lift up on plastic latch in the
middle of the wiper blade where
the wiper arm attaches.
3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down towards the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade to touch the windshield.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
Headlamp Aiming
The headlamp aiming system has
been preset at the factory.
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident, the aim of the headlamps
may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
It is recommended that a dealer/
retailer adjust the headlamps.
To re-aim the headlamps yourself,
use the following procedure.
The vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
.The vehicle should be placed so
the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft.)
from a light colored wall.
.The vehicle must have all four
tires on a level surface which is
level all the way to the wall.
9-32 Vehicle Care
.The vehicle should be placed so
it is perpendicular to the wall or
other flat surface.
.The vehicle should not have any
snow, ice, or mud on it.
.The vehicle should be fully
assembled and all other work
stopped while headlamp aiming
is being performed.
.The vehicle should be normally
loaded with a full tank of fuel and
one person or 75 kg (160 lbs)
sitting in the driver's seat.
.Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the
following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood
on
page 9‑5
.
Base
Up-Level
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
the low‐beam headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
Vehicle Care 9-33
4. At the wall measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
Base
9-34 Vehicle Care
Up-Level
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
The adjustment screw can be
turned with a E8 Torx
®
socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam
is aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs
on
page 9‑39
.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
Vehicle Care 9-35
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
{WARNING
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician service them.
The up‐level vehicle has HID
headlamps. The park lamp function
is also a function of the HID
headlamp. After an HID headlamp
bulb has been replaced, the beam
might be a slightly different shade
than it was originally. This is normal.
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps
Base Headlamp Assembly
The base model vehicle has a
halogen high-beam headlamp, a
low-beam/Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) headlamp and a turn signal/
parking lamp on the headlamp
assembly.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood
on
page 9‑5
.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp/DRL
B. High-Beam Headlamp
C. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
2. If replacing a headlamp bulb,
remove the dust cover from the
back of the headlamp housing
by turning counterclockwise
a quarter turn.
9-36 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the bulb socket from
the headlamp by turning
counterclockwise a quarter turn.
4. Remove the bulb from the
socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the
socket.
6. Install the bulb socket by turning
clockwise a quarter turn.
7. If a headlamp bulb was
replaced, Install the dust cover
in the back of the headlamp
housing by turning clockwise
a quarter turn.
Up–Level Headlamp Assembly
The up–level model vehicle has a
high intensity discharge (HID) high/
low beam, a dedicated DRL and a
turn signal lamp on the headlamp
assembly. The park lamp is also
the function of the HID headlamp.
See High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
on page 9‑35
for more
information.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood
on
page 9‑5
.A. DRL Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the
socket and reinstall the socket
into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise.
Vehicle Care 9-37
Fog Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Locate the bulb assembly under
the front facia.
2. Disconnect the bulb socket from
the electrical connector and pull
out the bulb assembly.
3. Remove the old bulb from the
bulb socket and push the new
bulb straight into the bulb socket
until it connects.
4. Push the bulb socket into the
bulb assembly to lock it into
place.
5. Reconnect the bulb socket to the
electrical connector.
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back–Up Lamp
To replace one of these lamps:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk
on
page 1‑11
.
2. Pull back the trunk trim.
3. Remove the four plastic wing
nuts retaining the taillamp
assembly in place.
9-38 Vehicle Care
4. Pull out the taillamp assembly
and disconnect the wiring
harness.
A. Back-up Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
5. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it.
6. Pull the old bulb straight out of
the bulb socket.
7. Push the new bulb straight into
the bulb socket until it clicks.
8. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
to reinstall.
9. Reconnect the wiring harness.
10. Push the taillamp assembly
back into place on the vehicle.
11. Turn the four wing nuts
clockwise to reinstall them.
12. Place the trunk trim to its
original location.
License Plate Lamp
The licence plate lamps for this
vehicle are on the trunk lid.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk
on
page 1‑11
for more information.
2. Push the end on either of the
lamp assemblies (passenger
side shown) and then move the
lamp assembly down to remove
it from trunk lid.
Vehicle Care 9-39
A. Bulb Socket
B. Lamp Assembly
C. Bulb
3. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove from
lamp assembly (C).
4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
the bulb socket.
5. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install into lamp assembly.
6. Move the lamp assembly into
the trunk lid engaging the clip
side first.
7. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb
Number
Back-Up Lamp W16W
Daytime Running
Lamp (Up-Level) 3157K
Fog Lamp H11LL
Front Turn Signal/
Park Lamp 3757NAK
Headlamp High
Beam (Base) H9
Headlamp Low
Beam (Base) H11LL
License Plate Lamp W5WLL
Rear Turn Signal 3757AK
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer/retailer.
9-40 Vehicle Care
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance of
circuit overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
.Headlamp Wiring
.Windshield Wiper Motor
.Power Windows and other
Power Accessories
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice, may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible.
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block
on
page 9‑41
,Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
on page 9‑44
, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block
on
page 9‑46
.
Vehicle Care 9-41
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover,
squeeze the three retaining clips on
the cover and lift it straight up.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
6 Wiper
12 Starter
21 Rear Power
Windows
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
22 Sunroof
24 Front Power
Windows
26 Antilock Brake
System Pump
9-42 Vehicle Care
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
27 Electric Park Brake
28 Rear Window
Defogger
41 Brake
Vacuum Pump
42 Cooling Fan K2
45 Cooling Fan K1
Mini Fuses Usage
1Transmission
Control Module
2Engine Control
Module Battery
5Engine Control
Module Ignition
8 Ignition Coils ‐Even
Mini Fuses Usage
9 Ignition Coils ‐Odd
10 Engine Control
Module
11
Post Catalytic
Converter Oxygen
Sensor Heater
13
Trans Ignition/Fuel
System Control
Module
16 MAF
17 Airbag Module
18 SBZ Ignition
23 Variable Effort
Steering
29 Power Lumbar, Left
32 Body Control
Module
Mini Fuses Usage
33 Heated Seat
34 Antilock Brake
System Valves
35 Amplifier
36 AFL Ignition
37 Right High Beam
38 Left High Beam
46 Cooling Fan Relay
47
Pre Catalytic
Converter Oxygen
Sensor Heater
48 Fog Lamps
49
Right High Intensity
Discharge
Headlamp
Vehicle Care 9-43
Mini Fuses Usage
50
Left High Intensity
Discharge
Headlamp
51 Horn
52 Cluster Ignition
53
Inside Rearview
Mirror, Rear Vision
Camera,
Vacuum Pump
54 Heating, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
55
Outside Rear View
Mirror, Universal
Garage Door
Opener, Window
Switch
Mini Fuses Usage
56 Windshield Washer
60 Heated Mirror
62 Canister Vent
64 AFL Battery
65 Theft Deterrent Horn
67 Fuel System Control
Module
69 Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
Mini Relays Usage
7Engine Control
Module
9 Cooling Fan
Mini Relays Usage
13 Cooling Fan
15 Run / Crank
17 Rear Window
Defogger
Micro
Relays
Usage
2 Starter
4 Wiper Speed
5 Wiper Control
10 Cooling Fan
14 Headlamp
Low Beam
9-44 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located in the instrument panel, on
the driver side of the vehicle. To
access the fuses, open the fuse
panel door by pulling down at
the top.
Press in on the sides of the door to
release it from the instrument panel.
Pull the door toward you to release
it from the hinge.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Vehicle Care 9-45
Fuses Usage
1Steering Wheel
Controls Backlight
2Body Control
Module 7
3Body Control
Module 5
4 Radio
5OnStar
®
Universal
Hands Free Phone
6 Power Outlet 1
7 Power Outlet 2
8Body Control
Module 1
9Body Control
Module 4
10 Body Control
Module 8
Fuses Usage
11
Front Heater
Ventilation Air
Conditioning/Blower
12 Passenger Seat
13 Driver Seat
14 Diagnostic Link
Connector
15 Airbag
16 Trunk
17
Heater Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Controller
18
Radio, OnStar
®
,
Universal Hands
Free Phone
19 Display
20 Automatic Occupant
Sensing
Fuses Usage
21 Instrument Panel
Cluster
22 Discrete Logic
Ignition Switch
23 Body Control
Module 3
24 Body Control
Module 2
25
Rear Heater
Ventilation Air
Conditioning/Blower
26 AC/DC Inverter
Relays Usage
R1 Trunk Relay
R2 Not Used
R3 Power Outlet Relay
9-46 Vehicle Care
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
The rear compartment fuse block is
located on the left side of the trunk
behind a cover. Mini Fuses Usage
5 Not Used
6Heated Steering
Wheel
7 Not Used
Mini Fuses Usage
8 Not Used
12 Not Used
15 Not Used
Vehicle Care 9-47
Mini Fuses Usage
16
Side Blind Zone,
Ultrasonic Rear Park
Assist
17 Not Used
18 PEPS
19 Not Used
20 Rear Sunshade,
Ventilated Seats
21 Not Used
22 Not Used
23 Not Used
24 Not Used
25 Not Used
26 Not Used
27 Not Used
28 Not Used
Mini Fuses Usage
29 Not Used
30 Not Used
31 Electronic
Suspension Control
32 Rear Seat
Infotainment
33 All‐Wheel Drive
J‐Case
Fuses
Usage
1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
J‐Case
Fuses
Usage
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
34 Not Used
35 PEPS
36 Not Used
37 Not Used
Relays Usage
K1 Not Used
K2 Seat Ventilation,
Sunshade
K3 Heated Steering
Wheel
K4 Not Used
9-48 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
{WARNING
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
.Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑12.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
.Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured
or broken by a sudden
impact —such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
.Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged,
replace them.
Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice
covered roads often, you may want
to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but
they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of
performance as winter tires on snow
or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction on
snow and ice covered roads. With
winter tires, there may be decreased
dry road traction, increased road
noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for
changes in vehicle handling and
braking.
Vehicle Care 9-49
See your dealer/retailer for details
regarding winter tire availability and
proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 9‑64.
If you choose to use winter tires:
.Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
.Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire's maximum speed capability.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size:The tire size is
a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size”illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification):Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation):The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
9-50 Vehicle Care
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN):The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is
the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material:The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG):Tire
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
on page 9‑67
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit:Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Tire Ply Material:The
type of cord and number of plies
in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(B) Temporary Use Only:The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If your vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire
on
page 9‑76
and If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑70
.
Vehicle Care 9-51
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN):The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is
the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit:Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation:The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure
on
page 9‑56
.
(F) Tire Size:A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification):Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width:The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
9-52 Vehicle Care
(C) Aspect Ratio:A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code:A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter:Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description:These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure:The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Accessory Weight:This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio:The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Belt:A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Vehicle Care 9-53
Bead:The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure:The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 9‑56
.
Curb Weight:The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings:A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR:Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12
.
GAWR FRT:Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits
on
page 8‑12
.
GAWR RR:Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the rear axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits
on
page 8‑12
.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa):The metric
unit for air pressure.
9-54 Vehicle Care
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index:An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating:The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight:The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits
on page 8‑12
.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall:The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure:Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure
on page 9‑56
and
Vehicle Load Limits
on
page 8‑12
.
Radial Ply Tire:A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Vehicle Care 9-55
Rim:A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall:The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating:An
alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction:The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread:The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
Treadwear Indicators:Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires
on page 9‑63
.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards):A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
on page 9‑67
.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits
on page 8‑12
.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire:Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard:A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label”under Vehicle
Load Limits
on page 8‑12
.
9-56 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.Too much flexing
.Too much heat
.Tire overloading
.Premature or
irregular wear
.Poor handling
.Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air
(over‐inflation), you can get
the following:
.Unusual wear
.Poor handling
.Rough ride
.Needless damage from
road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
For additional information
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits
on page 8‑12
. How
you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. The compact
spare should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire
on
page 9‑76
.
Vehicle Care 9-57
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release
air by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle's
tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the
vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
9-58 Vehicle Care
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
on page 9‑59
for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement
on
page 12‑17
for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
Vehicle Care 9-59
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle's tires and transmits the
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑12.
At the same time a message to
check the pressure in a specific tire
appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire
pressure warning light and the DIC
warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation
and displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑25.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
See Vehicle Load Limits
on
page 8‑12
, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Tire Pressure
on
page 9‑56
.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 9‑62
,Tire Rotation
on
page 9‑62
and Tires on page 9‑48.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire
sealant is not covered by your
warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
9-60 Vehicle Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
.One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not have
a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once
you re‐install the road tire
containing the TPMS sensor.
.The TPMS sensor matching
process was started but not
completed or not completed
successfully after rotating the
vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
“TPMS Sensor Matching
Process”later in this section.
.One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
.Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 9‑64.
.Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
Vehicle Care 9-61
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a
tire you can use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match
the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
3. Use the MENU button to select
the Vehicle Information Menu
in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to
the Tire Pressure Menu Item
screen.
5. Press the SET/CLR button to
begin the sensor matching
process.
A message asking if you are
sure you want to begin this
process should appear.
6. Press the SET/CLR button again
to confirm the selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
7. Start with the driver side
front tire.
8. Remove the valve cap from the
valve cap stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure
for five seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to
30 seconds to sound, confirms
that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this
tire and wheel position.
9-62 Vehicle Care
9. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 8.
10. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 8.
11. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 8. The horn sounds two
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
13. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
14. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It
Is Time for New Tires
on
page 9‑63
for more information.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to
8,000 miles). See Scheduled
Maintenance
on page 10‑2
.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 9‑63
and Wheel
Replacement
on page 9‑69
.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
Vehicle Care 9-63
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure
on
page 9‑56
and Vehicle Load
Limits
on page 8‑12
.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation
on page 9‑59
.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See
“Wheel Nut Torque”under
Capacities and Specifications
on
page 11‑2
.
{WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑70
.
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or
less of tread remaining.
9-64 Vehicle Care
The vehicle needs new tires if any
of the following statements are true:
.You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
.You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
.The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
.The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
.The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over
time. This is also true for the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one, even
if it is not being used. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this aging
takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically
wear out before they degrade due to
age. If you are unsure about the
need to replace the tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer
for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle,
when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors
Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
Vehicle Care 9-65
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of your
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling
on page 9‑49
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection
on page 9‑62
and Tire Rotation
on page 9‑62
for information on proper tire
rotation.
{WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as
it was developed for use on
your vehicle. See Compact
Spare Tire
on page 9‑76
.
{WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your
vehicle's tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and
bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
9-66 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC
Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non‐TPC
Spec rated tires may give a
low‐pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper
warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System
on
page 9‑57
.
Your vehicle's original
equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information
Label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12
, for more
information about the Tire and
Loading Information Label and
its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a
different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{WARNING
If you add different sized
wheels, your vehicle may not
provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and
suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires
on
page 9‑64
and Accessories and
Modifications
on page 9‑3
for
additional information.
Vehicle Care 9-67
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
The grades are molded on the
sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG) system does
not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on
a specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
9-68 Vehicle Care
Traction –AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature –A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if there
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked. If the
vehicle vibrates when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See
your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Vehicle Care 9-69
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it
(except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
{WARNING
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat
on
page 9‑70
for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{WARNING
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
9-70 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains
{WARNING
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove
the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
vehicle's wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road if possible.
{WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs
is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
Vehicle Care 9-71
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 5‑3.
{WARNING
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall on
you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even
killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
9-72 Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
The equipment you need is located
in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
3. Turn the retainer nut
counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire.
4. Place the spare tire next to the
tire being changed.
5. The jack and tools are stored
below the spare tire. Remove
them from their container and
place them near the tire being
changed.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat
on page 9‑70
for more
information.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the wheel nut caps.
If needed, finish loosening them
by hand. The nut caps will not
come off of the wheel cover.
The edge of the wheel cover
could be sharp, so do not try to
remove the cover with your bare
hands. Do not drop the cap or
lay it face down, as it could
become scratched or damaged.
Store the wheel cover in the
trunk until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
3. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not
remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
Vehicle Care 9-73
4. Position the jack head, as shown
Set the jack to the necessary
height before positioning it below
the jacking point.
5. Attach the jack handle.
{WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
{WARNING
Raising your vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
{WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
9-74 Vehicle Care
6. Turn the jack handle clockwise
to raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground for the compact
spare to fit under the vehicle.
7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
8. Remove the flat tire.
{WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑70
.
9. Remove any rust or dirt from the
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
10. Install the compact spare tire.
Vehicle Care 9-75
{WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
11. Put the wheel nuts back on
with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Turn
each nut clockwise by hand
until the wheel is held against
the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by
turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower
the jack completely.
{WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications
on page 11‑2
for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications
on
page 11‑2
for the wheel nut
torque specification.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
14. Lower the jack all the way and
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
9-76 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
To store the flat or spare tire and
tools:
1. Place the jack and tools in the
rear storage compartment.
2. Place the flat or spare tire in the
storage compartment below the
floor covering.
Secure it with the retainer nut.
If the wheel is larger than the
spare, place the floor cover on
the projecting wheel.
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
Compact Spare Tire
{WARNING
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire it was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, however, it can
lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 420 kPa (60 psi).
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 105 km/h
(65 mph) for distances up to
5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Vehicle Care 9-77
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire
or wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
Jump Starting
If the battery has run down, try to
use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
{WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.They contain acid that can
burn you.
.They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
The jump start positive (A) is
located under a trim cover in the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle.
This post is used instead of a direct
connection to the battery.
9-78 Vehicle Care
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching.
3. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park
on
page 8‑24
.
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and switch off all lights and
accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning
flashers if needed.
{WARNING
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 9-79
{WARNING
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you don't, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{WARNING
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Connect one end of the red
positive (+) cable to the jump
start positive (+) post (A). Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
6. Do not let the other end of the
red positive (+) cable touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the
good battery (B). Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Connect one end of the black
negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) terminal of the
good battery (C). Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step.
The other end of the negative (–)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (–) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9-80 Vehicle Care
8. Connect the other end of the
black negative (–) cable to an
unpainted heavy metal engine
part (D) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine
parts that move.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
10. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (–)
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the
positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals to their original
positions.
Vehicle Care 9-81
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled
vehicle should be towed with all
four wheels off the ground. Consult
your dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program
on
page 12‑6
.
To tow the vehicle behind
another vehicle for recreational
purposes —such as behind a
motorhome, see Recreational
Vehicle Towing following.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle –such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as dinghy towing and
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is
towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing
is towing the vehicle with two
wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known
as a dolly.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.What is the towing capacity
of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow
vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
.What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
.Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional
advice and equipment
recommendations.
.Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
9-82 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing From the Front
When dinghy towing, the vehicle
should be run at the beginning of
each day and at each RV fuel stop
for about five minutes. This will
ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
Use the following procedure to
dinghy tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle being towed
behind the tow vehicle and shift
the transmission to P (Park).
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set
the parking brake.
3. Following the manufacturer's
instructions, securely attach the
vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY and shift the
transmission to N (Neutral).
5. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
When towing the vehicle for
extended periods of time, start the
vehicle as often as possible to
prevent battery drain. This should
be done when the tow vehicle is
parked.
Dinghy Towing From the Rear
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed from the rear with all four
wheels on the ground.
Vehicle Care 9-83
Dolly Towing From the Front
.Vehicles with front-wheel drive
can be dolly towed from the
front.
.Vehicles with all-wheel drive can
be dolly towed from the front
with a maximum speed not to
exceed the legal limit or 50 km/h
(30 mph).
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow the vehicle from the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight ahead
position.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Dolly Towing From the Rear
The vehicle cannot be dolly towed
from the rear.
9-84 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle”later in this section.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Vehicle Care 9-85
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer. Follow all
manufacturer directions regarding
correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
9-86 Vehicle Care
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Wheels and Trim —Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle's
chrome with soap and water after
exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
Vehicle Care 9-87
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
and a buildup of vehicle wash/
wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.Extreme dusty conditions
.Sand and salt
.Heat and sun
.Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
9-88 Vehicle Care
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your dealer's/
retailer's body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Vehicle Care 9-89
Your dealer/retailer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
.Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
.Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
.Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
9-90 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
.For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
.For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
Vehicle Care 9-91
Leather
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat, steam,
or spot lifters or spot removers,
or shoe polish on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners
and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect leather
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the
leather and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the
vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be
used. If a more thorough cleaning
is necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
9-92 Vehicle Care
2NOTES
Service and Maintenance 10-1
Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10
General Information
Notice: Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to
keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps
to keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer/retailer.
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
.Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑12
.
.Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
.Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel
on
page 8‑49
.
10-2 Service and Maintenance
{WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer/
retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work.
See Doing Your Own Service
Work on page 9‑4.
At your General Motors dealer/
retailer, you can be certain that
you will receive the highest level
of service available. Your dealer/
retailer has specially trained service
technicians, uses genuine GM
replacement parts, as well as, up to
date tools and equipment to ensure
fast and accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
on page 10‑7
and
Maintenance Replacement Parts
on
page 10‑9
. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer/
retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed
when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km
(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire
Rotation on page 9‑62.
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil
on page 9‑11
.
An Emission Control Service.
When the “Change Engine Oil
Soon”message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained
service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
Service and Maintenance 10-3
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System
on
page 9‑13
.
When the “Service Engine Oil”
message displays, certain services,
checks, and inspections are
required. The services described
for Maintenance Ishould be
performed at every engine oil
change. The services described
for Maintenance II should be
performed when:
.Maintenance Iwas performed
the last time the engine oil was
changed.
.It has been 10 months or more
since the “Service Engine Oil”
message has displayed or since
the last service.
Maintenance I
.Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil
on page 9‑11
.
An Emission Control Service.
.Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant
on
page 9‑18
.
.Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid
on
page 9‑24
.
.Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
.Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑62.
.Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation
on page 9‑62
.
.Fluids visual leak check
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired
and the fluid level checked.
.Engine air cleaner filter
inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on
page 9‑15
.
.Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Maintenance II
.Perform all services described in
Maintenance I.
.Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection
for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
.Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
10-4 Service and Maintenance
.Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care
on page 9‑84
. Worn
or damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 9‑30.
.Body hinges and latches,
key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and sunroof
(if equipped) lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
on page 10‑7
.
More frequent lubrication may
be required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not
stick or squeak.
.Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 2‑24.
.Automatic transmission fluid
level check and adding fluid,
if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid
on
page 9‑14
.
.Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15.
.Passenger compartment
air filter replacement (or every
12 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be required if vehicle is
driven regularly under dusty
conditions.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.Engine oil level check.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑11.
.Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 9‑18.
.Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid
on
page 9‑24
.
Once a Month
.Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑56.
.Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑62.
Service and Maintenance 10-5
Once a Year
.See Starter Switch Check
on
page 9‑28
.
.See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control System
Check on page 9‑29.
.See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 9‑29.
.See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
on
page 9‑30
.
.Engine cooling system and
pressure cap pressure check.
Radiator and air conditioning
condenser outside cleaning.
See Cooling System
on
page 9‑17
.
.Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15.
.Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in
heavy city traffic in hot weather,
in hilly or mountainous terrain,
when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi,
police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑14.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service).
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9‑14.
.Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wires inspection.
An Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.Engine cooling system drain,
flush, and refill, cooling system
and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser
(or every 5 years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
System
on page 9‑17
.An
Emission Control Service.
.Engine accessory drive belt
inspection for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An
Emission Control Service.
10-6 Service and Maintenance
Service Maintenance I
Maintenance
II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • •
Engine coolant level check. • •
Windshield washer fluid level check. • •
Tire inflation pressures check. • •
Tire wear inspection. • •
Rotate tires. • •
Fluids visual leak check. • •
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • •
Brake system inspection. • •
Steering and suspension inspection. •
Engine cooling system inspection. •
Windshield wiper blades inspection. •
Body components lubrication. •
Restraint system components check. •
Automatic transmission fluid level check. •
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •
Passenger compartment air filter replacement. •
Service and Maintenance 10-7
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see
Engine Oil on page 9‑11.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL
®
Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen
®
Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON
®
-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
10-8 Service and Maintenance
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic Transmission DEXRON
®
-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Service and Maintenance 10-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48
3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side –65 cm (25.6 in) 25892079 —
Passenger Side –45 cm (17.7 in) 25892080 —
10-10 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
Service and Maintenance 10-11
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
10-12 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
Technical Data 11-1
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label ....................... 11-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN
is the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2
for the vehicle's
engine code.
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the
following information:
.Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.Model designation
.Paint information
.Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
11-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Application Capacities
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt
Fuel Tank
AWD 74.0 L 19.5 gal
FWD 70.5 L 18.6 gal
Technical Data 11-3
Application Capacities
Metric English
Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill)
2.4L L4 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 8.0 L 8.5 qt
3.0L V6 Engine, All Wheel Drive, 6–Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt
3.0L V6 Engine, Front Wheel Drive, 6–Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt
3.6L V6 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 150 Y110 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 9‑14
for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 Engine C Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
3.0L V6 Engine G Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
3.6L V6 Engine V Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
11-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.4L L4 Engine
(Electric Power Steering)
2.4L L4 Engine
(Hydraulic Power Steering)
3.0L, 3.6L V6 Engines
Customer Information 12-1
Customer
Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Assistance Offices
(US, Can) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
(US, Can) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program .................... 12-5
Roadside Assistance
Program .................... 12-6
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Courtesy Transportation
Program .................... 12-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-16
OnStar
®
.................... 12-16
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-17
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Buick. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your GM dealer's sales
or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
12-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO : If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the
Buick Customer Assistance Center
by calling 1-800-521-7300. In
Canada, contact General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1‐800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information
available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
.Vehicle Identification Number.
This is available from the vehicle
registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument
panel.
.Dealership name and location
.Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage
When contacting Buick, please
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One first if you have a
concern.
STEP THREE —U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However, in
the United States, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, you can file with the BBB
Auto Line Program to enforce your
rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Customer Information 12-3
STEP THREE —Canadian
Owners: In the event that you
do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps one
and two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively you may call the
General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to the Mediation/
Arbitration Program at the following
address. Your inquiry should be
accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance
Offices
Buick encourages customers to call
the toll-free number for assistance.
However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Buick, the letter
should be addressed to:
United States —Customer
Assistance
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
www.Buick.com
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-252-1112
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-496-9994
12-4 Customer Information
Canada —Customer
Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Overseas —Customer
Assistance
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) —Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with Buick by dialing:
1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/
buick
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle —all in one convenient
place.
.Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more
.Online service and maintenance
records
.Find Buick dealers for service
nationwide
.Exclusive privileges and offers
.Recall notices for your specific
vehicle
.OnStar
®
and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries
Customer Information 12-5
Other Helpful Links:
Buick —www.buick.com
Buick Merchandise —
www.buickmerchandise.com
Help Center —www.buick.com/
helpcenter
.FAQ
.Contact Us
My GM Canada
(Canada) —www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
access to:
.My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
.My Dealers/Retailers: Save
details such as address and
phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.My Driveway: Access quick
links to parts and service
estimates, check trade-in
values, or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
.My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
This program, available to qualified
applicants, can reimburse you up
to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for your vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very
limited period of time from the
date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine
your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
12-6 Customer Information
General Motors of Canada
also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance
Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call
1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
.Telephone number of your
location
.Location of the vehicle
.Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
.Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
.Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
160 000 km (100,000 miles),
whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program
at any time without notification.
Buick and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right
to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Customer Information 12-7
Services Provided
.Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
.Lock‐Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar
®
. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.
.Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to
the nearest Buick dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, or snow.
.Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire
with the spare tire. The spare
tire, if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner's responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the
tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
.Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.Legal fines.
.Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.
.Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
.Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
.Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
six request limit per year.
Additional travel information
is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
12-8 Customer Information
.Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometres from where
your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
.Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
you permission to get local
emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to
$100, after sending the original
receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.
Scheduling Service
Appointments
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact your
dealer/retailer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a
service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer/
retailer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until
it can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call
your dealership/retailer, let them
know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to
bring the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
Program
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and
extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranty in both the U.S.
and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information”furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Customer Information 12-9
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait.
However, if you are unable to
wait, GM helps to minimize your
inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending
on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
you with shuttle service to get you
to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip
shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the
dealer's shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may
be available. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts
for reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to
provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle that you obtain
if your vehicle is kept for an
overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and
must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
12-10 Customer Information
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will
be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right
to unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in
a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a
qualified technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle's
resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are
new parts made with the same
materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle
was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
Recycled original equipment
parts may also be used for repair.
These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses
in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Customer Information 12-11
Aftermarket collision parts are
also available. These are made
by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly
in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered
by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure
related to such parts are not
covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a
collision repair facility that meets
your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
12-12 Customer Information
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 2‑30.
Gather the following information:
.Driver's name, address, phone
number
.Driver's license number
.Owner's name, address, phone
number
.Vehicle license plate
.Vehicle make, model and
model year
.Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.Insurance company and policy
number
.General description of the
damage to the other vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts”earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 2‑30.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an
active role in its repair. If you have
a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to
the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
Customer Information 12-13
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if
your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as cost stays within reasonable
limits.
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on engines,
transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering,
body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order
Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, specify
year and model name of the vehicle.
12-14 Customer Information
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web
at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change
without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safecar.gov;or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safecar.gov.
Customer Information 12-15
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition
to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal
preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature
settings.
12-16 Customer Information
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how
a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
.How various systems in your
vehicle were operating
.Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.How fast the vehicle was
traveling
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar
®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on
data collection and use. See also
OnStar
®
System
on page 4‑43
in
this manual for more information.
Customer Information 12-17
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with
any other GM system containing
personal information.
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with RSS-210/211 of
Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
12-18 Customer Information
2NOTES
INDEX i-1
A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-37
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-15
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Airbag System (cont.)
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-30
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-27
Airbags
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-15
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Antenna
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-37
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-88
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Audio System
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-27
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Shiftlock Control System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 6-29, 6-32
i-2 INDEX
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-30
Bluetooth . . . . 6-42, 6-43, 6-46, 6-58
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4, 9-37
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-38
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-16
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-29
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-47
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 2-56
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-45
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-88
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-9
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-13
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . .12-10
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-16
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 6-29, 6-32
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . 8-36
Displays
Head-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Driving
Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .8-12
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
i-4 INDEX
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
E
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 4-20
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 8-35
Electronic Stability Control
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Check and Service Engine
Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Cooling System Messages . . .4-35
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-26
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-16
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 5-2
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .9-14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . 5-4, 9-37
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 2-8
INDEX i-5
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-50
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-49
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .4-24
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Requirements, California . . . . .8-50
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Gauges
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . 4-29
Headlamps
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-24
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2
Heated
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
i-6 INDEX
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 8-9
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 8-18, 8-19
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 4-4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-36
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . 1-4, 1-5
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-2
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-17
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Light
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .4-20
Lighting
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont.)
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-14
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Taillamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . 8-36
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 4-24
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
M
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-17
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25
Messages
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-37
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-35
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Messages (cont.)
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Mirrors
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
N
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
i-8 INDEX
O
Object Detection, Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .9-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-39
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
OnStar
®
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode . . . 9-23
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Overview
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Overview, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-5
P
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Parking
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-25
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-32
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . . 9-3
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . 6-42, 6-43,
6-46, 6-58
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Power (cont.)
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-17
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-8
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-17
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
INDEX i-9
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-45
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-81
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3–1-5
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-38
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .8-35
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-24
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-23
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8
Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 2-8
i-10 INDEX
Seats (cont.)
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-5
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 2-56
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1
Service (cont.)
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-36
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Storage
Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
System Check
Automatic Transmission
Shiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
INDEX i-11
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 4-25
Taillamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4
Theft-Deterrent
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 1-14
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-9
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-59
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-57
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Tires (cont.)
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-69
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-54
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-59
General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-53
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-34
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . .8-36
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .8-36
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Turn Signal
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
U
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-40
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Universal Remote System . . . . . 4-45
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
i-12 INDEX
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
W
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Where to Put the Child
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-30

Navigation menu